Avaya S83001 User Manual 96b29151 3632 4c21 8bfd 4329861df5a1
User Manual: avaya s83001 Avaya Home Theater Server S8300 User Guide |
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 370
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Installation and Upgrades for Avaya G700 Media Gateway and Avaya S8300 Media Server 555-234-100 Issue 4.1 December 2003 Copyright 2003, Avaya Inc. All Rights Reserved Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change. Warranty Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product, while under warranty, is available through the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support. Preventing Toll Fraud “Toll fraud” is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf). Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that, if toll fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services. Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support, in the United States and Canada, call the Technical Service Center's Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1-800-643-2353. How to Get Help For additional support telephone numbers, go to the Avaya support Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support. If you are: • Within the United States, click the Escalation Management link. Then click the appropriate link for the type of support you need. • Outside the United States, click the Escalation Management link. Then click the International Services link that includes telephone numbers for the international Centers of Excellence. Providing Telecommunications Security Telecommunications security (of voice, data, and/or video communications) is the prevention of any type of intrusion to (that is, either unauthorized or malicious access to or use of) your company's telecommunications equipment by some party. Your company's “telecommunications equipment” includes both this Avaya product and any other voice/data/video equipment that could be accessed via this Avaya product (that is, “networked equipment”). An “outside party” is anyone who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf. Whereas, a “malicious party” is anyone (including someone who may be otherwise authorized) who accesses your telecommunications equipment with either malicious or mischievous intent. Such intrusions may be either to/through synchronous (timemultiplexed and/or circuit-based) or asynchronous (character-, message-, or packet-based) equipment or interfaces for reasons of: • Utilization (of capabilities special to the accessed equipment) • Theft (such as, of intellectual property, financial assets, or toll facility access) • Eavesdropping (privacy invasions to humans) • Mischief (troubling, but apparently innocuous, tampering) • Harm (such as harmful tampering, data loss or alteration, regardless of motive or intent) Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associated with your system and/or its networked equipment. Also realize that, if such an intrusion should occur, it could result in a variety of losses to your company (including but not limited to, human/data privacy, intellectual property, material assets, financial resources, labor costs, and/or legal costs). Responsibility for Your Company’s Telecommunications Security The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment rests with you - Avaya’s customer system administrator, your telecommunications peers, and your managers. Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to: • • • • • • Installation documents System administration documents Security documents Hardware-/software-based security tools Shared information between you and your peers Telecommunications security experts To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment, you and your peers should carefully program and configure: • Your Avaya-provided telecommunications systems and their interfaces • Your Avaya-provided software applications, as well as their underlying hardware/software platforms and interfaces • Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products TCP/IP Facilities Customers may experience differences in product performance, reliability and security depending upon network configurations/design and topologies, even when the product performs as warranted. Standards Compliance Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Avaya Inc. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modifications, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. Pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules, the user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Avaya Inc. could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Product Safety Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following international Product Safety standards as applicable: Safety of Information Technology Equipment, IEC 60950, 3rd Edition including all relevant national deviations as listed in Compliance with IEC for Electrical Equipment (IECEE) CB-96A. Safety of Information Technology Equipment, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-00 / UL 60950, 3rd Edition Safety Requirements for Customer Equipment, ACA Technical Standard (TS) 001 - 1997 One or more of the following Mexican national standards, as applicable: NOM 001 SCFI 1993, NOM SCFI 016 1993, NOM 019 SCFI 1998 The equipment described in this document may contain Class 1 LASER Device(s). These devices comply with the following standards: • EN 60825-1, Edition 1.1, 1998-01 • 21 CFR 1040.10 and CFR 1040.11. The LASER devices operate within the following parameters: • Maximum power output: -5 dBm to -8 dBm • Center Wavelength: 1310 nm to 1360 nm Luokan 1 Laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposures. Contact your Avaya representative for more laser product information. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following international EMC standards and all relevant national deviations: Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference of Information Technology Equipment, CISPR 22:1997 and EN55022:1998. Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics – Limits and Methods of Measurement, CISPR 24:1997 and EN55024:1998, including: • • • • • • • • • Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 Radiated Immunity IEC 61000-4-3 Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000-4-4 Lightning Effects IEC 61000-4-5 Conducted Immunity IEC 61000-4-6 Mains Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8 Voltage Dips and Variations IEC 61000-4-11 Powerline Harmonics IEC 61000-3-2 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker IEC 61000-3-3 Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 15: Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Avaya attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990. REN Number For MCC1, SCC1, CMC1, G600, and G650 Media Gateways: This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On either the rear or inside the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number, and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. For G350 and G700 Media Gateways: This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the ringer equivalence number (REN) without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. For all media gateways: The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed 5.0. To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities. Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following tables. For MCC1, SCC1, CMC1, G600, and G650 Media Gateways: Manufacturer’s Port Identifier FIC Code SOC/REN/ Network A.S. Code Jacks Off premises station OL13C 9.0F RJ2GX, RJ21X, RJ11C DID trunk 02RV2-T 0.0B RJ2GX, RJ21X CO trunk 02GS2 0.3A RJ21X 02LS2 0.3A RJ21X Tie trunk TL31M 9.0F RJ2GX Basic Rate Interface 02IS5 6.0F, 6.0Y RJ49C 1.544 digital interface 04DU9-BN 6.0F RJ48C, RJ48M 04DU9-IKN 6.0F RJ48C, RJ48M 04DU9-ISN 6.0F RJ48C, RJ48M 04DU9-DN 6.0Y RJ48C Part 68: Answer-Supervision Signaling Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer-supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules. This equipment returns answer-supervision signals to the public switched network when: • answered by the called station, • answered by the attendant, or • routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment (CPE) user. This equipment returns answer-supervision signals on all direct inward dialed (DID) calls forwarded back to the public switched telephone network. Permissible exceptions are: • A call is unanswered. • A busy tone is received. • A reorder tone is received. 120A4 channel service unit Declarations of Conformity For G350 and G700 Media Gateways: Manufacturer’s Port Identifier FIC Code SOC/REN/ Network A.S. Code Jacks Ground Start CO trunk 02GS2 1.0A RJ11C DID trunk 02RV2-T AS.0 RJ11C Loop Start CO trunk 02LS2 0.5A RJ11C 1.544 digital interface 04DU9-BN 6.0Y RJ48C Basic Rate Interface 04DU9-DN 6.0Y RJ48C 04DU9-IKN 6.0Y RJ48C 04DU9-ISN 6.0Y RJ48C 02IS5 6.0F RJ49C For all media gateways: If the terminal equipment (for example, the media server or media gateway) causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact the Technical Service Center at 1-800-242- 2121 or contact your local Avaya representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. It is recommended that repairs be performed by Avaya certified technicians. The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. United States FCC Part 68 Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity (SDoC) Avaya Inc. in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB-168 label identification number complies with the FCC’s Rules and Regulations 47 CFR Part 68, and the Administrative Council on Terminal Attachments (ACTA) adopted technical criteria. Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset-equipped terminal equipment described in this document complies with Paragraph 68.316 of the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid Compatibility and is deemed compatible with hearing aids. Copies of SDoCs signed by the Responsible Party in the U. S. can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support. All Avaya media servers and media gateways are compliant with FCC Part 68, but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process was available. A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at: http://www.part68.org by conducting a search using “Avaya” as manufacturer. European Union Declarations of Conformity Avaya Inc. declares that the equipment specified in this document bearing the “CE” (Conformité Europeénne) mark conforms to the European Union Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (1999/5/EC), including the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC). This equipment has been certified to meet CTR3 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and CTR4 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and subsets thereof in CTR12 and CTR13, as applicable. Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support. Japan This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may occur, in which case, the user may be required to take corrective actions. This equipment, if it uses a telephone receiver, is hearing aid compatible. Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment. To order copies of this and other documents: Call: Avaya Publications Center Voice 1.800.457.1235 or 1.207.866.6701 FAX 1.800.457.1764 or 1.207.626.7269 Write: Globalware Solutions 200 Ward Hill Avenue Haverhill, MA 01835 USA Attention: Avaya Account Management E-mail: totalware@gwsmail.com For the most current versions of documentation, go to the Avaya support Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support. Contents Contents About This Book • Overview 21 • Audience 21 • Using this book 21 • Conventions 22 Terminology 22 Typography 22 Commands 22 Keys 23 User input 23 System output and field names 23 • Downloading this book Downloading this book 1 21 24 24 • Safety labels and security alert labels 24 • Related resources 25 • Technical assistance 25 International 26 • Trademarks 26 • Ordering Documentation 26 • Sending us comments 26 Roadmap and Reference 27 • Wizards for Installations and Upgrades 28 Wizard Reference Web Page 28 Wizard Summary 28 The Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) 30 What the IW Does and Does Not Do 30 Electronic Worksheets and Templates 31 The Upgrade Tool You cannot use the Upgrade Tool to do the following: The Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard • Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Checklist 1: Install a New G700 with an S8300 (Primary or LSP) Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 32 32 33 34 35 5 Contents Checklist 2: Install a New G700 without an S8300 38 Checklist 3 Upgrade an Existing G700 with an S8300 (R1.x to R2.0) 40 Checklist 4 Upgrade an Existing G700 with an S8300 (R2.0 to R2.x) 42 Checklist 5: Upgrade an Existing G700 without an S8300 44 • Connection and Login Methods 45 Connection Overview 46 Summary of S8300 and G700 Access Methods and Tasks 46 Laptop Configuration for a Direct Connection to the Services Port 47 Settings for a Direct Connection to S8300, S8500, or S8700 Services Port Connection Methods 51 Connect Laptop to Services Port of S8300 51 Connect Laptop to the G700 Serial Port 51 Connect Laptop to Customer LAN 52 Connect the External Modem to the S8300 Media Server: 52 Set up Windows for Modem Connection to the Media Server (Windows 2000 or XP) 53 Configure the Remote PC for PPP Modem Connection (Windows 2000 or XP, Terminal Emulator, or ASA) 53 Use Windows for PPP Modem Connection (Windows 2000 or XP) 54 Use Avaya Terminal Emulator for LAN Connection to Communication Manager 54 Use Avaya Terminal Emulator for Modem Connection to Communication Manager 55 Log in Methods 56 Log in to the Media Server from Your Laptop using Telnet 57 Log in to the S8300 Web Interface from Your Laptop 57 Open the Replace variable w/ ProductName SAT Screens 62 Log in to the P330 stack Processor with a Direct Connection to the Services Port 62 Log in to the P330 Stack Processor with a LAN Connection 63 Log in to the P330 Stack Processor with a Direct Serial Connection 63 Log in to the P330 Stack Processor with Device Manager 64 Avaya Site Administration Configure Avaya Site Administration 6 47 64 64 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Contents 2 • Navigational Aid for CLI Commands 66 • Terminal Emulation Function Keys for Communication Manager 67 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server 69 • Getting Started G700 Media Gateway 70 70 G700 Media Gateway Chassis and Processors 70 Media Modules 71 Data Expansion Modules 72 S8300 LED Indicators 73 Media Servers 73 S8300 Media Server 74 S8500 Media Server 74 S8700 Media Server 75 Endpoint and Adjunct Components 75 Plan the Installation 75 Use the Planning Documentation 76 SSO Authentication Login 76 Site Verification 76 Network Integration 77 • Installation and Cabling On Site Checklist 78 78 Environmental Verification 78 Power Verification 79 Grounding Verification 79 Unpack and Check the Order 79 Install the G700 Media Gateway 80 Prepare the G700 Media Gateway 81 Mount the G700 Media Gateway in the Rack 81 Insert the Avaya S8300 Media Server (If Necessary for Standalone Service or LSP) 83 Insert the Media Modules 85 Insert an Expansion Module 87 Insert an Avaya X330STK Stacking Module 88 Cable Multiple Units 89 Attach Ground Conductors 92 General Grounding Requirements Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 92 7 Contents Approved Grounds 93 Connect the Safety Ground 94 Connect AC Power 95 Power Requirements 95 Test the AC Outlet 95 Plug in AC Power 97 Check and Connect DC Power 3 98 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 • Installation Overview 102 G700 components 102 Software and firmware files 102 System Access 102 Initial Access to the G700 102 Access to the S8300 and G700 102 • Before Going to the Customer Site 104 Off-site Tasks 104 Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager 104 Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary 104 Check FTP Server for Backing up Data 104 License File and Communication Manager Versions for a Local Survivable Processor 105 Complete and Download the License File to Your Laptop 105 Run the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the INADS IP Address, if Necessary 106 Obtain the Static Craft Password 106 Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary 106 • On-Site Preparation for the Installation 108 Install the New License File, If Necessary 8 101 108 If Necessary, Rename Old License and Authentication Files from S8300 FTP Directory 108 Load License File (from Your Laptop) 108 If Necessary, Install License and Authentication Files 110 Run Save Translations (Only If New License and/or Authentication Files Installed) 111 Determine Necessary Upgrades to the S8300 111 Transfer Files from a CD or Laptop 111 Download Files Screen 112 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Contents • Install New Software on the S8300 Verify the Time, Date, and Time Zone Install New Software Configure the S8300 114 114 114 123 Configure Server Screen 123 Select Method Screen 124 Set Server Identities Screen 125 Configure Ethernet Interfaces Screen 126 Configure Local Survivable Processor Screen 127 Ethernet Adjuncts Screen 128 External DNS Server Configuration Screen 129 Set Network Routes Screen 130 Network Time Server Screen 131 Set Modem Interface Screen 133 Warning Screen 133 Updating System Files Screen 134 Provide the keys.install File (If Necessary) • Configure the G700 Media Gateway Assign the IP Addresses of the G700 Media Gateway Components Check for IP Connections Set up the Controller List for the G700 Media Gateway Set the LSP Transition Points Configure an X330 Expansion Module (If Necessary) • Install New Firmware on the G700 Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory 135 137 137 140 141 143 144 145 145 Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 145 Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor 146 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor 147 Install New Firmware on the Media Modules 148 • Administer Communication Manager The Primary Controller is an S8300 151 151 Assign Node Names and IP Addresses for the LSPs 151 Administer Network Regions 152 Associate LSPs with Network Regions 153 Administer IP Interfaces 154 Administer the LSP Form 154 The Primary Controller is an S8500 or S8700 (the S8300 Is an LSP) Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 155 9 Contents Assign Node Names and IP Addresses for the C-LANs and LSPs 156 Administer Network Regions 156 Assign LSPs to the Network Regions 158 Administer IP Interfaces 159 Administer the LSP Form 160 Administer the Media Gateway 161 • Considerations for IP Phones Supported by a Local Survivable Processor Transition of Control from Primary Controller to LSP 4 165 • Set Up SNMP Alarming on the G700 166 • Complete the Installation of S8300 (if the Primary Controller) 168 • Complete the Installation Process 169 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 • Installation Overview 171 171 System Components 171 G700 components 171 Firmware files 171 TFTP Server 171 Initial Access to the G700 172 Access to the S8300 and G700 172 • Before Going to the Customer Site 174 Off-site Tasks 174 Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary 174 Set Up the TFTP Server on Your Laptop or on a Customer PC, if Necessary 174 Download G700 Firmware Files to Your TFTP Directory 176 For a Bundled Firmware File 176 For Individual Firmware Files 176 • Configure the G700 178 Assign the IP Addresses of the G700 Media Gateway Components Check for IP Connections 178 181 Assign the IP Addresses of the G700 Media Gateway Components Check for IP Connections 183 186 Set up the Controller List for the G700 Media Gateway Set the LSP Transition Points 187 189 Configure an X330 Expansion Module (If Necessary) 10 164 190 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Contents • Prepare to Install Firmware on the G700 Access the P330 Stack Processor 191 Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory 191 Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 • Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Firmware Installation Procedures 191 194 194 Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor 194 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor 194 Install New Firmware on the Media Modules 196 • Administer Communication Manager The Primary Controller is an S8300 198 198 Assign Node Names and IP Addresses for the LSPs 198 Administer Network Regions 199 Associate LSPs with Network Regions 200 Administer IP Interfaces 200 Administer the LSP Form 201 The Primary Controller is an S8500 or S8700 201 Assign Node Names and IP Addresses for the C-LANs and LSPs 202 Administer Network Regions 202 Assign LSPs to the Network Regions 204 Administer IP Interfaces 205 Administer the LSP Form 206 • Complete the Installation Process 5 191 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 System Access • Task Summary 209 211 211 212 Before Going to the Site 212 On-site Preparation Tasks 212 S8300 Upgrade Tasks 212 G700 Upgrade Using the Wizards 213 G700 Manual Upgrade Tasks 213 G700 Pre-upgrade Tasks 213 G700 Upgrade Tasks 213 Post-Upgrade Tasks Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 213 11 Contents • Before Going to the Customer Site 214 Get USB CD-ROM Drive 214 Collect Upgrade Information 214 If Upgrading from Release 1.1, Fill in the EPW 214 Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager 214 Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary 214 Check Number of Allocated Ports 215 Check FTP Server for Backing up Data 215 Get Software/Firmware Files 215 Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary 216 Complete the RFA Process (Obtain license and password file) 217 License File and Communication Manager Versions for a Local Survivable Processor 217 Complete and Download the License File to Your Laptop 217 Run the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the INADS IP Address, if Necessary 218 Obtain the Static Craft Password 218 • On-site Preparation for the Upgrade 219 Access to the S8300 Access the S8300 via Telnet 219 Access the S8300 via the Maintenance Web interface 219 Access SAT 219 Check Current Software Release 220 Pre-Upgrade Tasks — If the S8300 is the Primary Controller 221 Clear Alarms 221 Check Link Status 221 Record All Busyouts 222 Disable Scheduled Maintenance 222 Check for Translation Corruption 222 Stop the LSPs (if applicable) 222 Disable Alarm Origination 223 Get IA770 (AUDIX) Data and Stop IA770 (if IA770 is being used) 224 Back up recovery system files 224 Back up data 12 219 224 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Contents Record Configuration Information 226 If Upgrading from 1.2 or Later 226 If Upgrading from Pre-1.2 Release 226 • Upgrade the S8300 Install the Pre-Upgrade Software Update (patch) Update procedure Back Up the System Files (Linux Migration Web Procedure) Linux Migration Backup Upgrade the S8300 227 227 227 229 229 232 Copy Remastering Program (RP) file to the S8300 hard drive 232 Install the RP software 232 Set Telnet Parameters 233 Remaster Hard Drive and Install the Upgrade Software 233 Verify Software Version 236 Copy Files to the S8300 236 Configure the Network Parameters 238 If Upgrading from a Pre-1.2 Release 239 Restore Translations 239 Configure the Server 239 Verify Connectivity 240 Restore the Linux Migration Backup File 240 If IA770 Is Being Used, Ensure that Messaging Is Disabled 243 Verify the Time, Date, and Time Zone 243 Install Post-Upgrade Communication Manager Update File from Your Laptop, if any 244 Verify Media Server Configuration 245 Install the New License File 246 Install the New Authentication File 247 Save Translations 247 Verify Operation 249 Next Steps 249 • Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 250 Using the Installation Wizard 250 Using the Upgrade Tool 250 Manual Upgrade Procedures 250 Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory 250 Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 251 Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor 252 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 13 Contents Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor 253 Install New Firmware on the Media Modules 254 Install New Firmware on Other G700 Media Gateways 256 • If the S8300 is Using IA770 257 Install and Restart IA770 257 Save Translations 259 Install IA770 update (patch) files, if any 259 • Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) 6 260 Check Media Modules 260 Enable Scheduled Maintenance 260 Busy Out Trunks 260 Check for Translation Corruption 260 Resolve Alarms 260 Re-enable Alarm Origination 261 Back up the System 261 Restart LSPs (if any) 261 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x System Access 263 • Task Summary 264 Before Going to the Site 264 On-Site Preparation Tasks 264 If the S8300 is a Primary Controller 264 S8300 is Either a Primary Controller or LSP 264 S8300 Upgrade Tasks 264 G700 Upgrade Using the Wizards 264 G700 Manual Upgrade Tasks 265 G700 Pre-Upgrade Tasks 265 G700 Upgrade Tasks 265 Post-upgrade Tasks 265 • Before Going to the Customer Site 266 Collect Upgrade Information 14 263 266 Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager 266 Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary 266 Check Number of Allocated Ports 266 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Contents Check FTP Server for Backing up Data 267 Get Software/Firmware Files 267 Complete the RFA Process (Obtain license and password file) 267 License File and Communication Manager Versions for a Local Survivable Processor 268 Complete and Download the License File to Your Laptop 268 Run the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the INADS IP Address, if Necessary 268 Obtain the Static Craft Password 269 Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary 269 • On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Access to the S8300 270 270 Access the S8300 via Telnet 270 Access the S8300 via the Maintenance Web interface 270 Access SAT 270 Pre-Upgrade Tasks — If the Target S8300 is the Primary Controller 271 Clear Alarms 271 Check Link Status 271 Record All Busyouts 271 Disable Scheduled Maintenance 272 Check for Translation Corruption 272 Stop the LSPs (if applicable) 272 Disable Alarm Origination 273 Get IA770 (AUDIX) Data and Stop IA770 (if IA770 is being used) 273 Back up recovery system files 274 Back up data Install New License and Authentication Files, If Necessary 275 276 If Necessary, Rename Old License and Authentication Files from S8300 FTP Directory 276 Load License File (from Your Laptop) 276 If Necessary, Install License and Authentication Files 278 Run Save Translations (Only If New License and/or Authentication Files Installed) 279 Transfer Files from a CD or Laptop 279 Download Files Screen Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 280 15 Contents • Upgrade the S8300 282 Install the Upgrade Software 282 Using the Wizard 282 Manual Installation 282 Install New Software 282 Make the Upgrade Permanent 289 Install Post-Upgrade Communication Manager Update File from Your Laptop, if any 290 Install IA770 update (patch) files, if any 290 • Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 291 Using the Installation Wizard 291 Using the Upgrade Tool 291 Manual Upgrade Procedures 291 Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory 291 Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 292 Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor 293 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor 294 Install New Firmware on the Media Modules 295 Install New Firmware on Other G700 Media Gateways 297 • Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) 7 Check Media Modules 298 Enable Scheduled Maintenance 298 Busy Out Trunks 298 Check for Translation Corruption 298 Resolve Alarms 298 Re-enable Alarm Origination 298 Back up the System 299 Restart LSPs (if any) 299 Upgrading an Existing G700 without an S8300 • Upgrade Overview System Components 301 301 301 G700 components 301 Firmware files 301 TFTP Server 301 System Access Access to the G700 16 298 302 302 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Contents • Before Going to the Customer Site Off-site Tasks 303 Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary 303 Set Up the TFTP Server on Your Laptop or on a Customer PC, if Necessary 303 Download G700 Firmware Files to Your TFTP Directory 305 For a Bundled Firmware File 305 For Individual Firmware Files 305 • On-Site Preparation for the Upgrade 307 Access the P330 Stack Processor 307 Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory 307 Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 • Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Firmware Installation Procedures 8 303 307 310 310 Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor 310 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor 310 Install New Firmware on the Media Modules 312 Connecting Telephones and Adjunct Systems • Installation and Wiring Telephones and Power Supplies 315 316 Connectable Telephones and Consoles 316 Connect Telephones 317 Install and Wire Telephone Power Supplies 317 Typical Adjunct Power Connections 317 Adjunct Power Connections End-to-End 318 Auxiliary Power for an Attendant Console 319 1152A1 Mid-Span Power Distribution Unit 320 P333T-PWR Power over Ethernet Stackable Switch 324 1151B1 and 1151B2 Power Supplies 326 Install Emergency Transfer Unit and Associated Telephones 328 Connect an Analog Station or 2-Wire Digital Station 329 • Complete the Telephone Installation Process 331 Install the Coupled Bonding Conductor 331 Install Circuit Protection 331 Over-Voltage and Sneak-Current Protection Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 331 17 Contents • IA 770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Application 333 Shared Resources of Coresidency 333 CWY1Board and Software 333 No Data Link and No Voice Ports to Connect 334 AUDIX Hunt Group Still Necessary 334 IA 770 INTUITY AUDIX Installations and S8300 Upgrades for IA 770 INTUITY AUDIX 334 • INTUITY AUDIX LX Messaging System 335 • ASAI Co-Resident DEFINITY LAN Gateway (DLG) 335 Administration Task Summary (for the S8300 Media Server) 336 Supported Ethernet Interfaces 336 • Call Center 337 Avaya G700 Announcement Software 337 • Avaya Integrated Management A B 18 339 Avaya ATM WAN Survivable Processor Manager 339 Avaya Directory Enabled Management 339 Avaya MultiService Network Manager 340 Avaya MultiService SMON Manager 340 Avaya Fault and Performance Manager 340 Avaya Proxy Agent 341 Avaya Configuration Manager 341 Avaya Site Administration 341 Avaya Terminal Configuration 341 Avaya Terminal Emulator 341 Avaya Voice Announcement Over LAN Manager 342 Avaya VoIP Monitoring Manager 342 • Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 343 Technical Information 345 • Avaya G700 Media Gateway Technical Specifications 345 • Cabling Equipment 346 Information Checklists 347 • Installer's Checklist 347 • Serial Number and Login Information 349 G700 Serial Numbers 349 Logins 349 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Contents • Set-Up for P330 Stack Processor 350 • Set Up for G700 Media Gateway Processor (MGP) 351 • Set Up for VoiP Resources 352 • Set Up for S8300 Media Server 353 • Installation Site Information 354 • Stack Layout 355 C Equipment List 357 D Replacing the G700 Media Gateway 365 Index 367 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 19 Contents 20 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 About This Book Overview About This Book Overview This document provides procedures to install, upgrade, or add to an Avaya G700 Media Gateway controlled by an Avaya S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server. It also includes information on connecting telephones and adjuncts to the G700. This chapter provides information about the document including: the intended audience, the organization, conventions used, how to get help, and how to download, order, and comment on the document. Audience This book is for the following audiences: • • • • Trained field installation and maintenance personnel Technical support personnel Network engineers and technicians Authorized Business Partners Using this book This book is organized into five installation and/or upgrade scenarios: • • • • • Chapter 3, “Installing a New G700 with an S8300” Chapter 4, “Installing a New G700 without an S8300” Chapter 5, “Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0” Chapter 6, “Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x” Chapter 7, “Upgrading an Existing G700 without an S8300” Read Chapter 1, “Roadmap and Reference”, before you begin the installation. Chapter 1 contains checklists for the four installation and upgrade scenarios. Then read and follow the procedures in the chapters that apply to the installation or upgrade scenario you are working with. Chapter 1 also contains information on alternative methods to connect to and access a G700 system. Read Chapter 2, “Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server” for instructions on installing and cabling the hardware. Read Chapter 8, “Connecting Telephones and Adjunct Systems” if you need to install phones or adjuncts. Chapter 7 covers the IA 770 INTUITYTM AUDIX® Messaging Application, the INTUITYTM LX Messaging System, the G700 Sourced Announcements, Avaya Integrated Management, the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), and Universal Serial Bus (USB) Modems. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 21 About This Book Conventions See the following appendices for system specifications, forms you must complete for the installation, and comcodes and other information that you need to order equipment: • Appendix A, “Technical Information” contains specifications and other technical information that you need to install an S8300 Media Server with a G700 Media Gateway. • Appendix B, “Information Checklists” contains the pre-installation worksheets that you will need to have filled in before you start an installation or upgrade. • Appendix C, “Equipment List” contains the information that you need to order equipment. • Appendix D, “Replacing the G700 Media Gateway” contains a high-level procedure for replacing an installed G700 with a new one. Conventions This section describes the conventions that we use in this book. Physical dimensions • All physical dimensions in this book are in English units followed by metric units in parentheses. • Wire gauge measurements are in AWG followed by the diameter in millimeters in parentheses. Terminology Avaya Communication Manager is the application that provides call control and the Avaya telephony feature set. This application was referred to as MultiVantage Software or as Avaya Call Processing (ACP) in previous releases. The term Multivantage is still used in some CLI commands and in the Web interface. In most of these cases, it is synonymous with Communication Manager. Typography This section describes the typographical conventions for commands, keys, user input, system output, and field names. Commands • Commands are in constant-width bold type. Example: Type change-switch-time-zone and press Enter. • Command variables are in bold italic type when they are part of what you must type, and in plain italic type when they are not part of what you must type. Example: Type ch ma machine_name, where machine_name is the name of the call delivery machine. 22 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 About This Book Conventions • Command options are in bold type inside square brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type copybcf [-F34]. Keys • The names of keys are in bold sans serif type. Example: Use the Down Arrow key to scroll through the fields. • When you must press and hold a key and then press a second or third key, we separate the names of the keys are separated with a plus sign (+). Example: Press ALT+D. • When you must press two or more keys in sequence, we separate the names of the keys are separated with a space. Example: Press Escape J. • When you must press a function key, we provide the function of the key in parentheses after the name of the key. Example: Press F3 (Save). User input • User input is in bold type, whether you must type the input, select the input from a menu, or click a button or similar element on a screen or a Web page. Example: — Type exit, and then press Enter. — On the File menu, click Save. — On the Network Gateway page, click Configure > Hardware. System output and field names • System output and field names on the screen are in monospaced type. Example: — The system displays the following message: The installation is in progress. — Type y in the Message Transfer? field. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 23 About This Book Downloading this book Downloading this book You can view or download the latest version of the Installation and Upgrades for Avaya G700 Media Gateway and Avaya S8300 Media Server, 555-234-100, from the Avaya Web site at: http://support.avaya.com. You must have access to the Internet, and a copy of Acrobat Reader must be installed on your personal computer. Avaya makes every effort to ensure that the information in this book is complete and accurate. However, information can change after we publish this book. Therefore, the Avaya Web site might also contain new product information and updates to the information in this book. You can also download these updates from the Avaya Support Web site. Downloading this book To download the latest version of this book: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Access the Avaya web site at http://support.avaya.com. 7 On the next page, scroll down and click one of the following options: On the left side of the page, click Product Documentation. The system displays the Welcome to Product Documentation page. On the right side of the page, type 555-234-100, and then click Search. The system displays the Product Documentation Search Results page. Scroll down to find the latest issue number, and then click the book title that is to the right of the latest issue number. — PDF Format to download the book in regular PDF format — ZIP Format to download the book in zipped PDF format Safety labels and security alert labels Observe all caution, warning, and danger statements to help prevent loss of service, equipment damage, personal injury, and security problems. This book uses the following safety labels and security alert labels: CAUTION: A caution statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to software, loss of data, or an interruption in service. ! WARNING: A warning statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to hardware or equipment. 24 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 About This Book Related resources ! WARNING: Use an ESD warning to call attention to situations that can result in ESD damage to electronic components. ! DANGER: A danger statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to personnel. ! SECURITY ALERT: A security alert calls attention to a situation that can increase the potential for unauthorized use of a telecommunications system. Related resources For a summary of what is new in the December 2003 release of Avaya Communication Manager, see Highlights of Avaya Communication Manager, 555-245-704. For more information on the Avaya G700 Media Gateway and related features, see the following books: Title Number Overview for Avaya G700 Media Gateway and Avaya S8300 Media Server 555-234-200 Maintenance Commands Reference 555-245-101 Maintenance Alarms Reference 555-245-102 Maintenance Procedures 555-245-103 Quick Start: Avaya G700 Media Gateway Hardware Installation 555-233-150 Technical assistance Avaya provides the following resources for technical assistance. Within the United States For help with: • Feature administration and system applications, call the Avaya DEFINITY Helpline at 1-800-225-7585 • Maintenance and repair, call the Avaya National Customer Care Support Line at 1-800-242-2121 • Toll fraud, call Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention at 1-800-643-2353 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 25 About This Book Trademarks International For all international resources, contact your local Avaya authorized dealer. Trademarks All trademarks identified by the ® or TM are registered trademarks or trademarks, respectively, of Avaya Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Ordering Documentation In addition to this book, other description, installation, maintenance, and administration books, and documentation library CDs, are available. This document (555-234-100) and any other Avaya documentation can be ordered directly from the Avaya Publications Center toll free at 1-800-457-1235 (voice) and 1-800-457-1764 (fax). International customers should use +1.207.866.6701 (voice) and +1.207.626.7269 (fax). Sending us comments Avaya welcomes your comments about this book. To reach us by: • Mail, send your comments to: Avaya Inc. Product Documentation Group Room B3-H13 1300 W. 120 Ave. Westminster, CO 80234 USA • E-mail, send your comments to: document@avaya.com • Fax, send your comments to: 1-303-538-1741 Ensure that you mention the name and number of this book, Installation and Upgrades for Avaya G700 Media Gateway and Avaya S8300, 555-234-100. 26 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference 1 Roadmap and Reference This chapter provides guidance on how to use this book along with connection, login, and other reference information that you will need to perform the installation an upgrade procedures in later chapters. This Chapter is organized as follows: • • • • • Wizards for Installations and Upgrades Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Connection and Login Methods Navigational Aid for CLI Commands Terminal Emulation Function Keys for Communication Manager Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 27 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Wizards for Installations and Upgrades Wizards for Installations and Upgrades To save time on installations and upgrades, three distinct tools are available for your use — the Avaya Installation Wizard, the Gateway Installation Wizard, and the Upgrade Tool. NOTE: These tools do not replace all normal installation or upgrade procedures described in this document. However, they do automate some or many of the tasks associated with an installation or an upgrade. The tasks that these tools automatically perform are noted in subsequent chapters of this document. Wizard Reference Web Page You can find the most recent versions of the wizards, as well as wizard Job Aids at http://support.avaya.com/avayaiw. Tip: Field- and page-level online help is available with all the wizards. Wizard Summary The following table shows at-a-glance when you would use each tool. Table Legend: IW= Avaya Installation Wizard UT = Upgrade Tool GIW = Gateway Installation Wizard). New Installation Upgrade Software Upgrade Firmware Component Use S8500 or S8700 as a Primary Controller IW IW as an LSP IW IW, UT* as a Primary Controller IW IW with an S8300 IW IW, UT† GIW UT S8300 G350 or G700 without an S8300 * Use the UT to schedule upgrades of multiple LSPs. Use the IW on site for an immediate upgrade of a single LSP. † Use UT to schedule upgrades of multiple gateways. Use the IW on site for an immediate upgrade of a single gateway or G700 stack. 28 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Wizards for Installations and Upgrades The following table summarizes when you would use each tool and what it does for you. If you need to: Then use: Install new or upgrade existing S8300, S8500 or S8700 Media Servers, including: The Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) on site, with a laptop connection to the Services port on the media server. NOTE: • The G350 or G700 that Since the source files for an upgrade are large, the IW requires that these source files be accessible (to the media server running the IW) over a high-bandwidth connection. The files could be on the media server’s hard drive (ftp/pub directory), on a CD-ROM drive connected to the media server, or on the CD-ROM drive or hard drive on a technician’s laptop directly connected to the media server. If the source files are available on one of these media, you could use the IW from a remote location using a dialup PPP connection to the media server (with modem enabled) running the IW. contains an S8300 • Other G700s in the stack • G350/G700 media modules This wizard installs new (or upgrades existing) software on media servers and performs the initial configuration. It upgrades firmware on new or existing media gateway processors and media modules. You will also use the Electronic Pre-installation Worksheet, which you get from your project manager. For the S8300/G700, you may also use the Name and Number List and the Custom Template with the wizard for more comprehensive custom installations. Install a new G350 or G700 that does not contain an S8300 The Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) on site, with a laptop connection to the G350 or G700. This wizard configures the IP addresses for the gateway, including the gateway processors, the controller list, and the VoIP engine. The GIW does not install firmware on the G350 or G700 or their media modules. You can install firmware manually, or use the UT. Schedule upgrades of multiple, geographically-distributed LSPs or G350/G700 gateways, all of which have the same remote primary controller — S8300, S8500, or S8700. The Upgrade Tool (UT), running on the primary controller, using a remote network connection. This tool enables you to upgrade: • the software on all LSPs registered with the primary controller • the processor and media module firmware for all gateways currently or previously registered with the primary controller. NOTE: If the customer has purchased and installed the MultiService Software Update Manager, you may wish to use it, instead, to upgrade G350 or G700 Media Gateways. However, the Software Update Manager cannot upgrade LSPs. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 29 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Wizards for Installations and Upgrades The Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) You can use the Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) as a tool to assist you in the installation and upgrade processes for S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Servers and G350 and G700 Media Gateways. The Installation Wizard is designed to get you up and running in a basic installation as quickly as possible. For customized installations, optional custom templates are also available. The Avaya Installation Wizard ships with the media server software and is accessible on the home page of the Integrated Management web interface. The most recent version of IW, as well as its documentation, can be accessed online at http://support.avaya.com/avayaiw. NOTE: To use the IW, Communication Manager Release 2.0 or later must be running on the media server (S8300, S8500, or S8700). If the correct release of Communication Manager has not been installed on the media server, you need to upgrade the software before you begin using the IW. What the IW Does and Does Not Do The IW does not automate all tasks in an S8300 Media Server installation. Of the tasks described in Chapter 3, Installing a New G700 with an S8300, the IW automates the following: • • • • • Transfer Files from a CD or Laptop on page 111 and its subtasks Install New Software on the S8300 on page 114 and its subtasks Configure the S8300 on page 123 Configure the G700 Media Gateway on page 137 and its subtasks “Install Communication Manager Patch Files from Your Laptop, if Any”, which is a subtask of Install New Software on the S8300 on page 114 • “Administer Network Regions” for an S8300 Media Server as primary controller, which is a subtask of Administer Communication Manager on page 151. NOTE: The IW administers the S8300 network region as the default, 1. • Administer the Media Gateway on page 161 NOTE: In addition, you can use the IW to upgrade media server software or gateway firmware on a previously-installed system. The IW automates similar tasks in Chapters 4–6. You must perform the following tasks manually, even though you are using the IW: • Install all hardware • Tasks in Before Going to the Customer Site on page 104 • Set custom LSP transition points when the defaults are not adequate (see Set the LSP Transition Points on page 84) 30 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Wizards for Installations and Upgrades • Any tasks related to adding LSPs to the primary controller you are installing, as documented in Administer Communication Manager on page 151: • Any tasks related to administration of the primary controller in Administer Communication Manager on page 151 • Set Up SNMP Alarming on the G700 on page 166, if required Electronic Worksheets and Templates To enable the IW to automatically configure and install the system, get the following Excel spreadsheet files from the project manager and load them onto your laptop: • Electronic Pre-installation Worksheet • Names/Number List Template (for S8300/G700 only) • Customization Template NOTE: Information on how to use these files is contained within the files themselves. Electronic Pre-installation Worksheet For greatest efficiency, obtain the Electronic Pre-Installation Worksheet (EPW), which is filled in by the customer and Avaya project manager. This worksheet is an Excel spreadsheet from which IW automatically pulls data to configure and install the S8300/S8500/S8700 Media Servers, G350/G700 Media Gateways, P330 Stack Processor, and VoiP Engines. The EPW also can be used to supply basic translations for the S8300/G700 configuration. The default values used by the wizard can be viewed at http://support.avaya.com/avayaiw under the "View Default Parameters" link. If the wizard defaults do not meet the customer’s needs, you can use a custom template. Once the EPW has been imported, all the values from the EPW appear as defaults in the wizard. Names/Number List Template (for S8300/G700 only) The Names/Number Template, like the EPW, is an Excel spreadsheet that contains user administration data. The IW pulls this data to automatically administer users on the new system. This administration includes users’ names, extensions, telephone types, classes of service, languages, locations, and voice mail capability. The native display name (unicode) is included. As each user's name and accompanying data is imported, the wizard will administer the station using the provided information along with default values for other station fields. After the import has completed, each station will be ready to be plugged into the wall jack and activated. Analog and digital phones will be ready for a TTI registration sequence. IP phones will be ready for an IP registration sequence. Customization Template The Customization Template is a third Excel spreadsheet that allows automatic administration of key custom Communication Manager translations. These are: • Classes of Service • Feature Access Codes • Trunk Access Codes Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 31 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Wizards for Installations and Upgrades • Telephone button assignments • TTI codes • Voice mail hunt group number and coverage path The Upgrade Tool The LSP/Gateway Upgrade Tool allows you to schedule automatic upgrades of Local Survivable Processors (LSPs) and G350 and G700 Media Gateways from the primary controller. The primary controller can be an S8300, S8500 or an S8700. With the upgrade tool, you do not have to physically be at the LSP and gateway locations in order to perform the upgrades. Additionally, you do not have to run the upgrades one by one. You simply enter the needed information for all LSPs, G350s, and G700s into the upgrade tool. Then, at the scheduled time, the Upgrade Tool automatically upgrades the software and firmware on all the specified LSPs and gateways. NOTE: You must still complete the normal prerequisite tasks such as completing the RFA process for license files and uploading the most recent .tar file (for an LSP) to the /var/home/ftp/pub directory or uploading the most recent firmware (for a media gateway) to a TFTP server. You cannot use the Upgrade Tool to do the following: • Install a new LSP or G350 or G700 Media Gateway. For each new installation, you must be on site and use the Avaya Installation Wizard (for an LSP), the Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard (for a media gateway), or perform a manual installation. • Upgrade LSPs to Avaya Communication Manager 2.0. An LSP must already have Communication Manager 2.0 or higher. Thus, the Upgrade Tool is used for upgrades to software higher than Communication Manager 2.0. • Upgrade an active LSP (one that has taken control of calls because of a problem with the primary controller) • • • • Upgrade the S8300 Media Server acting as the primary controller. Upgrade an S8500 or S8700 Media Server. Upgrade P330 Expansion modules. Upgrade G600, G650, CMC1, SCC1, or MCC1 Media Gateways. The Upgrade Tool ships with the media servers and is available on the home page of the media server’s Maintenance Web Interface. For more information, see Job Aid: Upgrade Tool and Worksheets. 32 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Wizards for Installations and Upgrades The Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard Use the Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) to configure a new G350 or G700 Media Gateway that is controlled by a remote media server but does not have an S8300 installed in slot V1. The GIW allows you to configure the gateway IP addresses without having to enter CLI commands. The Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) allows you to configure the G700 Media Gateway IP addresses and avoid entering P330 and MG CLI commands to configure the media gateway. Use the GIW to configure a new G700 Media Gateway that is controlled by a remote S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server and does not have an S8300 LSP. NOTE: The GIW allows you to configure IP addresses only. You must complete the normal installation tasks such as uploading the most recent firmware to a TFTP server and installing the firmware on the media gateway and its components. Also, you cannot use the GIW to configure an X330 Expansion module. The GIW can be accessed online at http://support.avaya.com/avayaiw. For more information, see Job Aid: Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard and Pre-installation Worksheet. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 33 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Installation Roadmap and Task Lists From your planning sheets, you can determine what type of installation or upgrade is involved with the G700 Media Gateway. Use the following table to determine which task list is most appropriate for your upgrade or installation. New Installation Upgrade an Existing System 34 G700 with an S8300 (Primary or LSP) G700 without an S8300 Checklist 1 Checklist 2 Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 R1.x to R2.0: Checklist 3 Chapter 5 Checklist 5 R2.0 to R2.x: Checklist 4 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 G700 Controlled by an S8300 with IA 770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging See Installation Checklists in the IA 770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging documentation, available on the Avaya S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Server Library CD, 555-233825 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Checklist 1: Install a New G700 with an S8300 (Primary or LSP) Use the following checklist to install a G700 Media Gateway with the following characteristics: • The G700 has an S8300 Media Server configured as the primary controller, or, • The G700 has an S8300 Media Server configured as an LSP and is controlled by an S8300, S8500, or an S8700 Media Server. You will use Chapters 2 and 3 with this checklist. For help with connecting to and logging in to the G700 or S8300, see Connection Methods in this chapter. Table 1: Install New G700 with an S8300 (Primary or LSP) Major Tasks Subtasks Installation Overview on page 102 - G700 components - Software and firmware files - Access to the S8300 and G700 Before Going to the Customer Site on page 104 - Get planning forms - Get the G700 serial number - Check FTP server for backups - Complete the RFA process - Download update (Patch) software to laptop, if necessary Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server on page 69 - On site checklist - Unpack and check the order - Install the G700 - Cable multiple units - Attach ground conductors On-Site Preparation for the Installation on page 108 - Install new license file, if necessary - Install authentication file, if necessary - Save translations - Determine software to install Install New Software on the S8300 on page 114 - Set time, date, and timezone - Install new software - Make the Upgrade Permanent - Install Communication Manager Update (patch), if any - Install IA770 update (patch), if any 1 of 3 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 35 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Table 1: Install New G700 with an S8300 (Primary or LSP) Continued Major Tasks Subtasks Configure the S8300 on page 123 - Backup data - Set server indentities - Configure Ethernet interfaces - Configure LSP - Configure Ethernet adjuncts - Configure External DNS server - Set Static network routes, if necessary - Configure network time server - Set modem interface - Update system - Load Key files, if necessary Configure the G700 Media Gateway on page 137 - Assign IP addresses to the G700 processors - Set up IP routing for the stack - Set up default IP route for the G700 - Check IP connections - Set up controller list for the G700 - Configure X330 Expansion Module, if necessary Install New Firmware on the G700 on page 145 - Verify contents of the tftp directory - Determine which firmware to install - Install firmware on the P330 stack processor - Install firmware on the G700 media gateway processor - Install firmware on the media modules - Install firmware on other G700s in the stack or network, if any Administer Communication Manager on page 151 - Reboot the system - Assign node names, if necessary - Administer network regions - Assign LSPs to network regions - Administer IP interfaces - Administer the LSP form - Add media gateway - Verify changes - Enable announcements, if necessary - Save translations Considerations for IP Phones Supported by a Local Survivable Processor on page 164 Set Up SNMP Alarming on the G700 on page 166 2 of 3 36 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Table 1: Install New G700 with an S8300 (Primary or LSP) Continued Major Tasks Subtasks Complete the Installation of S8300 (if the Primary Controller) on page 168 - Register the system - Back up the system - Check planning documentation - Connect and administer test endpoints - Complete electrical installation - Enable adjunct systems Complete the Installation Process on page 169 - Check planning documentation - Connect and administer test endpoints - Complete electrical installation - Enable adjunct systems 3 of 3 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 37 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Checklist 2: Install a New G700 without an S8300 Use the following checklist to install a G700 Media Gateway with the following characteristics: • The G700 does not have an S8300 and is controlled by an external S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server. You will use Chapters 2 and 4 with this checklist. For help with connecting to and logging in to the G700, see Connection Methods in this chapter. Table 2: Install a New G700 without an S8300 Major Task Subtasks Before Going to the Customer Site on page 174 - Get planning forms - Get the G700 serial number - Set up TFTP server, if necessary - Download firmware files Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server on page 69 - On site checklist - Unpack and check the order - Install the G700 - Cable multiple units - Attach ground conductors Configure the G700 on page 178 - Assign IP addresses to the G700 processors - Set up IP routing for the stack - Set up default IP route for the G700 - Check IP connections - Set up controller list for the G700 - Configure X330 Expansion Module, if necessary Prepare to Install Firmware on the G700 on page 191 - Verify contents of the tftp directory - Determine which firmware to install on page 193 - Install firmware on the P330 stack processor - Install firmware on the G700 media gateway processor - Install firmware on the media modules - Install firmware on other G700s in the stack or network, if any 1 of 2 38 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Table 2: Install a New G700 without an S8300 Continued Major Task Subtasks Administer Communication Manager on page 198 - Reboot the system - Assign node names, if necessary - Administer network regions - Assign LSPs to network regions - Administer IP interfaces - Administer the LSP form - Add media gateway - Verify changes - Enable announcements, if necessary - Save translations Complete the Installation Process on page 209 - Check planning documentation - Connect and administer test endpoints - Complete electrical installation - Enable adjunct systems 2 of 2 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 39 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Checklist 3 Upgrade an Existing G700 with an S8300 (R1.x to R2.0) Use the following checklist to upgrade a G700 Media Gateway with the following characteristics: • The G700 has an S8300 Media Server configured as the primary controller. or, • The G700 has an S8300 Media Server configured as an LSP and is controlled by either an S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server. You will use Chapter 5 with this checklist. For help with connecting to and logging in to the G700 or S8300, see Connection Methods in this chapter. Table 3: Task List to Upgrade an Existing G700 with an S8300 (R1.x to R2.0) Major Tasks Subtasks Before Going to the Customer Site on page 214 - Get the USB CD-ROM drive - Fill in EPW (if upgrading from 1.1) - Get planning form - Get the G700 serial number - Check number of allocated ports - Check FTP server for back up - Get software/firmware files - Download update (Patch) software to laptop, if necessary - Complete the RFA process On-site Preparation for the Upgrade on page 219 - Check current software release - Pre-Upgrade tasks — If the Target S8300 is the Primary Controller - Get IA770 data and stop IA770 - Back up recover system files - Record configuration information - Install the pre-upgrade update - Back up the system files 1 of 2 40 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Table 3: Task List to Upgrade an Existing G700 with an S8300 (R1.x to R2.0) Continued Major Tasks Subtasks Upgrade the S8300 on page 227 Install the Upgrade Software: - Copy RP files to hard drive - Install the RP software - Set telnet parameters - Install the upgrade software - Verify software version - Copy licence and authentication files to the S8300 - Configure S8300 network parameters - If upgrading from a pre-1.2 release - Restore Linux Migration backup files - Disable messaging - Verify date and time - Install post-upgrade patch, if necessary - Verify S8300 configuration - Install license file - Install authentication file, if necessary - Save translations (if not using IA770) - Verify operation Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 on page 250 - Decide whether to use the Installation Wizard If not using the Wizard: - Verify contents of the tftp directory - Determine which firmware to install - Install firmware on the P330 stack processor - Install firmware on the G700 media gateway processor - Install firmware on the media modules - Install firmware on other G700s in the stack or network, if any - Install and restart IA770, if being used - Install IA770 update (patch), if any - Save translations (if using IA770) Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) on page 260 - Check media modules - Enable scheduled maintenance - Busyout trunks - Check for translation corruption - Resolve alarms - Re-enable alarm origination - Back up system - Restart LSPs, if any 2 of 2 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 41 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Checklist 4 Upgrade an Existing G700 with an S8300 (R2.0 to R2.x) Use the following checklist to upgrade a G700 Media Gateway with the following characteristics: • The G700 has an S8300 Media Server configured as the primary controller. or, • The G700 has an S8300 Media Server configured as an LSP and is controlled by either an S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server. You will use Chapter 6 with this checklist. For help with connecting to and logging in to the G700 or S8300, see Connection Methods in this chapter. Table 4: Task List to Upgrade an Existing G700 with an S8300 (R2.0 to R2.x) Major Tasks Subtasks Before Going to the Customer Site on page 266 - Get planning form - Get the G700 serial number - Check number of allocated ports - Check FTP server for back up - Get software/firmware files - Complete the RFA process - Download update (Patch) software to laptop, if necessary On-site Preparation for the Upgrade on page 270 - Pre-Upgrade tasks — If the Target S8300 is the Primary Controller - Get IA770 data and stop IA770 - Back up recover system files - Install new license and authentication files, if necessary - Save translations, if new license and/or authentication files installed - Transfer files from CD or laptop Upgrade the S8300 on page 282 Install the Upgrade Software: - Decide whether to use the Wizard - Manual installation - Configure S8300 - Make the upgrade permanent - Install Communication Manager update (patch), if any - Install IA770 update (patch), if any 1 of 2 42 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Table 4: Task List to Upgrade an Existing G700 with an S8300 (R2.0 to R2.x) Continued Major Tasks Subtasks Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 on page 291 - Decide whether to use the Installation Wizard Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) on page 298 - Check media modules - Enable scheduled maintenance - Busy out trunks - Check for translation corruption - Resolve alarms - Re-enable alarm origination - Back up system - Restart LSPs, if any If not using the Wizard: - Verify contents of the tftp directory - Determine which firmware to install - Install firmware on the P330 stack processor - Install firmware on the G700 media gateway processor - Install firmware on the media modules - Install firmware on other G700s in the stack or network, if any 2 of 2 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 43 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Installation Roadmap and Task Lists Checklist 5: Upgrade an Existing G700 without an S8300 Use the following checklist to upgrade a G700 Media Gateway with the following characteristics: • The G700 does not have an S8300 and is controlled by an external S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server. You will use Chapter 7 with this checklist. For help with connecting to and logging in to the G700, see Connection Methods in this chapter. Table 5: Task List to Upgrade an Existing G700 without an S8300 44 Major Tasks Subtasks Before Going to the Customer Site on page 303 - Get planning forms - Get the G700 serial number - Set up TFTP server, if necessary - Download firmware files Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server on page 69 - On site checklist - Unpack and check the order - Install the G700 - Cable multiple units - Attach ground conductors On-Site Preparation for the Upgrade on page 307 - Verify contents of the tftp directory - Determine which firmware to install Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway on page 310 - Install firmware on the P330 stack processor - Install firmware on the G700 media gateway processor - Install firmware on the media modules - Install firmware on other G700s in the stack or network, if any Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods Connection and Login Methods This section describes the various ways of connecting to, and logging into, the Avaya™ S8300 Media Server and the Avaya™ G700 Media Gateway. Use this chapter as a reference for the other chapters in this book. The procedures in this book assume that you are connecting to the S8300 and/or the G700 with an Avaya Services laptop. However, the methods apply for any type of PC. This chapter is organized with the following sections: • • • • • Connection Overview Laptop Configuration for a Direct Connection to the Services Port Connection Methods Log in Methods Navigational Aid for CLI Commands Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 45 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods Connection Overview Review Physical Access Methods 1 Check the following figure for the location of the S8300 Services port. Summary of S8300 and G700 Access Methods and Tasks Initial Configuration and Maintenance S8300 Onsite Tasks: 1. Configure media server 2. Install license and authentication files, and upgrade software 3. Verification testing 4. Run diagnostics 5. Upgrade software and configuration Tools: 1. Avaya Installation Wizard 2. Web Interface 3. Command Line Interface 4. System Access Terminal (SAT) Remote Access of S8300 and G700 Crossover cable Services port cydcacc2 KLC 091003 2 46 To analog trunk USB modem USB ports USB cable Console port V1 System Admin Computer or Technician Laptop Administration via Corporate LAN Tasks: 1. Backup and restore data 2. Upgrade and configuration 3. Administer network 4. Admin Telephony features Tools: 1. Avaya Installation Wizard 2. Web Interface 3. Native Configuration Manager 4. System Access Terminal (SAT) 1. Diagnosis of media server 2. Alarm notification Technician laptop Ethernet ports Straight cable System admin computer Crossover cable Serial cable LAN Technician laptop Initial Configuration and Maintenance G700 Media Gateway (when no S8300) Onsite Tasks: 1. Configure master and stack 2. Configure MGP, MM and ports 3. Update configuration 4. Run diagnostics Tools: 1. Gateway Installation Wizard 2. Command Line Interface If you are installing or upgrading a G700 that does not have an internal S8300, check for the location of the ethernet ports (EXT 1 / EXT 2). You will need to connect the G700 to the customer’s LAN via one of these ports for loading the latest software. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods Laptop Configuration for a Direct Connection to the Services Port There is a special configuration that you need to use for a direct connection to the S8300 or S8700 Services port. NOTE: Avaya Service technicians can use the NetSwitcher program to configure alternate network profiles so they can easily connect to a number of different systems. NetSwitcher configures a profile for each type of system for easy future access without requiring you to reset TCP/IP properties or browser settings manually. NetSwitcher is available from an Avaya Services CTSA. Settings for a Direct Connection to S8300, S8500, or S8700 Services Port A laptop connected directly to the Services Ethernet interface on the S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server requires a specific configuration as described in this section. On any operating system, the network settings need to reflect the following: • TCP/IP properties. Set the laptop’s TCP/IP properties as follows: — IP address: 192.11.13.5 — Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252 • Browser settings. Configure the browser for a direct connection to the Internet. Do not use proxies. • Server address. Access the S8300 media server using the URL http://192.11.13.6 The names of the dialog boxes and buttons vary on different operating systems and browser releases. Use your computer’s help system if needed to locate the correct place to enter this information. The S8300 Media Server uses the same access configuration as an Avaya S8100 Media Server with a CMC1 or G600 Media Gateway. If you already have a NetSwitcher profile for the S8100 Media Server (formerly called DEFINITY One), try using that profile first before configuring a new one. Set TCP/IP properties on Windows systems TCP/IP administration varies among Windows systems as described below. NOTE: Make a record of any IP addresses, DNS servers, or WINS entries that you change when you configure your services computer. Unless you use the NetSwitcher program or an equivalent, you will need to restore these entries to connect to other networks. Check Your Version of Windows 1 Log in to your laptop, and double-click the My Computer icon on your desktop. The My Computer window opens. 2 Click Help on the My Computer window’s toolbar. The Help menu opens and displays the version of Windows installed on your laptop. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 47 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 3 Follow one of the two procedures below, depending on your operating system. Change TCP/IP Properties and Network Settings (Windows 2000 and XP) 1 2 Right-click My Network Places on your desktop or under the Start menu in XP. Select Properties to display the Network and Dial-up Connections window. Windows should have automatically detected the Ethernet card in your system and created a LAN connection for you. More than one connection may appear. 3 4 5 6 7 Right-click the correct Local Area Connection from the list in the window. Select Properties to display the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Click the Properties button. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties screen appears. On the General tab, select the radio button Use the following IP address. Enter the following: — IP address: 192.11.13.5 — Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252 NOTE: Record any IP addresses, DNS settings, or WINS entries that you change. You may need to restore them later to connect to another network. 8 Disable DNS service as follows: a Click the radio button labeled Use the following DNS server addresses. The entries for Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server should both be blank. b Click the Advanced button at the bottom of the screen. The Advanced TCP/IP Settings screen appears. c Click the DNS tab. Verify that no DNS server is administered (the address field should be blank). 9 Disable WINS Resolution as follows: a Click the WINS tab. Make sure WINS is not administered (the address field should be blank). b Click OK. If warned about an empty primary WINS address, click Yes to continue. 10 Click OK twice to accept the address information and close the TCP/IP and Local Area Connection Properties dialog boxes. 11 Reboot the system if directed to do so. After you have made these changes to your computer’s network configuration information, the Network and Dial-up Connections window shows the status of the Local Area Connection: — Enabled appears when the laptop's Ethernet cable is connected to the server. — Disabled or unplugged appears if the NIC is not connected to anything. Change TCP/IP properties (Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, and Millennium Edition [ME]) 1 Access your computer's network information. On your desktop: — Windows 95, 98, and NT: Right-click Network Neighborhood. — Windows ME: Right-click My Network Places. 2 48 Select Properties to display the Network dialog box. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 3 Locate the TCP/IP properties as follows: — Windows 95, 98, and ME: On the Configuration tab, scroll through the installed network components list to the TCP/IP part of the devices list. Select the TCP/IP device that corresponds to your Ethernet card. — Windows NT: On the Protocols tab, select TCP/IP in the installed network components list. 4 5 6 Select the Properties button. In the TCP/IP Properties box, click the IP Address tab. Click the radio button to Specify an IP address, and enter the following: — IP address: 192.11.13.5 — Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252 NOTE: Record any IP addresses, DNS settings, or WINS entries that you change. You may need to restore them later to connect to another network. 7 Disable DNS service as follows: — Windows 95, 98, and Me: Click the DNS Configuration tab. Verify that the Disable DNS radio button is selected. — Windows NT: Click the DNS tab. • If any IP addresses appear under DNS Service Search Order, make a note of them in case you need to restore them later. • Select each IP address in turn and click the Remove button. 8 Disable WINS Resolution as follows: — Windows 95, 98, and Me: Click the WINS Configuration tab. Verify that the Disable WINS Resolution radio button is selected. — Windows NT: Click the WINS Address tab. • If any IP addresses appear for the Primary and Secondary WINS servers, make a note of them in case you need to restore them later. • Clear each server entry. • Clear the checkbox for Enable DNS for WINS Resolution. 9 10 Click OK twice to accept the address information and close the Network dialog box. Reboot the system if directed to do so. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 49 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods Disable/bypass proxy servers in browser If you are connecting a laptop directly to the Services Ethernet interface on the S8300 faceplate, you must either disable or bypass proxy servers as described below. NOTE: The Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) browser is recommended. If you use IE, it must be version 5.5 or higher. You can use Netscape, but some features of the web interface may not work properly. If you use Netscape, it must be version 6.2 or higher. To check or change proxy settings: 1 2 Open your Internet browser. Verify that you have a direct connection with no proxies as follows: For Internet Explorer a b c d Select Tools > Internet Options. Click the Connections tab. Click the LAN Settings button. If Use a proxy server for your LAN is not selected, no change is necessary; click Cancel to exit. e If Use a proxy server for your LAN is selected, you can: — deselect it and click OK to exit — or you can leave it selected and configure your browser to bypass the proxy server whenever you are connected to the S8300 services port as follows: • click Advanced • Type 192.11.13.6 in the Exceptions box. If there are other entries in this box, add to the list of entries and separate entries with a “;”. • Click OK to exit. For Netscape a b c d Select Edit > Preferences. Under Category, click Advanced. Click Proxies. If Direct connection to the Internet is selected, no change is necessary; click Cancel to exit. e If Direct connection to the Internet is not selected, you can: — select it and click OK to exit; — or you can leave it unselected and configure your browser to bypass the proxy server whenever you are connected to the S8300 services port as follows: • Select Manual Proxy Configuration and click View • Type 192.11.13.6 in the Exceptions box (or in the No Proxy for: box in later versions of Netscape). If there are other entries in this box, add to the list of entries and separate entries with a ";". • Click OK to exit. 50 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods Connection Methods Connect Laptop to Services Port of S8300 To connect your laptop directly to the S8300 Media Server: 1 2 Make sure your laptop meets the hardware and software requirements. Plug an Ethernet crossover cable (MDI to MDI-X) into the 10/100 BaseT Ethernet network interface card (NIC) on your laptop. — Crossover cables of various lengths are commercially available. — See the following table for pinout connections if needed. Crossover of the transmit and receive pairs (as shown) is required. Crossover cable pinout chart Pin to S8300 Services Port 3 4 Connects to Pin to Laptop Ethernet card 8 8 7 7 6 2 5 5 4 4 3 1 2 6 1 3 Connect the other end of the crossover cable to the Services port on the front of the S8300. If your laptop is configured with the correct network settings, you can now open your Internet browser or start a Telnet session and log in. When accessing the server from a directly connected laptop, always type the following IP address in the browser's Address or Location field to access the server: 192.11.13.6 Connect Laptop to the G700 Serial Port To configure a G700 that does not have an S8300, you may need to set up a direct connection from your laptop’s serial port to the G700 Console (serial) port. To connect a laptop directly to the serial port on the G700 Media Gateway: 1 For a stacked configuration, locate the device that contains the master controller for the stack. Check the LED panel on the upper left of each G700 or P330 device in the stack as follows: — G700 Media Gateway: a lit MSTR LED indicates that this unit is the stack master. — A non-G700 P330 device: a lit SYS LED indicates that this unit is the stack master. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 51 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 2 Connect the RS-232 serial cable and DB-9 adapter cable provided with the G700 between your laptop and the G700: — Attach one end of the RS-232 cable to the RJ-45 jack on the front of the G700 that is the stack master. The serial port is on the lower right side of the chassis, labeled Console. — Plug the other end of the RS-232 cable into the RJ-45 jack on the DB-9 adapter cable. — Connect the other end of the DB-9 adapter cable to the 9-pin serial port on your laptop. 3 Use a serial-connection program such as HyperTerminal to access the P330 stack processor. Connect Laptop to Customer LAN To connect to the customer’s LAN, either on site or remotely over the Internet, your PC must be assigned an IP address on the LAN. The IP address can be a static address on the customer’s LAN that you enter in the TCP/IP properties or it can be assigned dynamically with DHCP. Ask the customer how they want you to make the connection. Connect the External Modem to the S8300 Media Server: Each S8300 Media Server requires a Universal Serial Bus (USB) modem for maintenance access and to call out an alarm. The external modem may be connected to the S8300 Media Server through a universal serial bus (USB) connection, providing dial-up access. The modem requires its own external analog line. • The modem type is not optional and must be the specific modem that is shipped with the S8300. • The remote connection should support a data speed of at least 33.6 Kbps. • The remote PC must be administered for PPP connections in order to connect through a modem. A dial-up connection is typically used only for services support of the server, not for routine administration. If the Server is administered to report OSS alarms, it uses the same line for alarm notification. The server cannot report any new alarms while this line is in use. 1 Connect one end of the modem’s USB cable to an available USB port on the S8300 Media Server’s faceplate. Either USB1 or USB2 can be used. 2 3 Connect the other end of the cable to the external modem. Connect the modem to an external analog line. NOTE: The modem that is shipped with the S8300 obtains its power from the USB interface. There is no power connection. 4 5 Verify operation as instructed by the modem’s documentation. To enable the modem, access the S8300 Media Server’s Maintenance Web Pages (see Log in to the S8300 Web Interface from Your Laptop on page 57), and click Enable/Disable Modem on the main menu The system displays the Enable/Disable Modem window. 52 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 6 Click the radio button for one of the following: — Enable modem for one incoming call — use this option if you want to provide one-time access to the Media Server over the modem. — Enable modem for unlimited incoming calls — use this option if you want to provide regular dial-up access to the Media Server for Services personnel or some other reason. The modem is now ready to receive calls. Set up Windows for Modem Connection to the Media Server (Windows 2000 or XP) NOTE: The remote dial-up PC must be configured for PPP access. Also, Avaya Terminal Emulator does not support Windows XP. 1 2 3 4 Right-click My Network Places and click Properties. 5 6 On the Connection Availability screen, click For all users or Only for myself, as appropriate. 7 8 Check the Add a shortcut to my desktop, if desired, and click Finish. Click Make New Connection and follow the Network Connection Wizard: Select Dial-up to private network on the Network Connection Type screen. In the Phone number field, enter the appropriate telephone number inserting special digits such as 9 and 1 or *70, if necessary. On the Completing the Network Connection Wizard screen, type the name you want to use for this connection. This name will appear in the Network and Dial-up Connections list. If a Connect screen appears, click Cancel. Configure the Remote PC for PPP Modem Connection (Windows 2000 or XP, Terminal Emulator, or ASA) 1 On your PC’s desktop, right-click My Network Places and click Properties. The system deploys the Network and Dial-up Connections window. 2 Double click the connection name you made in the previous task, Set up Windows for Modem Connection to the Media Server (Windows 2000 or XP). NOTE: Depending on your system, the Connect screen may appear, from which you must select Properties. 3 4 5 6 7 Click the Security tab. 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. Select the Advanced (custom settings) radio button. Check the Show terminal window checkbox. Click the Networking tab. In the Components box, verify that Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and Client for Microsoft Networks are both checked. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 53 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 9 10 11 Click the Advanced button. Uncheck (clear) the Use default gateway on remote network box. Click OK three times to exit and save the changes. Use Windows for PPP Modem Connection (Windows 2000 or XP) NOTE: To access the system, you may need RAS access and ASG Mobile access. 1 Return to the Network and Dial-up Connections window and right-click the connection you just created. 2 3 Select Connect. 4 Click the Dial button. When the media server’s modem answers, the system displays the After Dial Terminal window. 5 Log on to the LAN. Leave the User Name, Password, and Domain fields blank. If the Dial field is blank, enter the appropriate telephone number. a Enter your remote access login name and password. b When the Start PPP Now! message appears, click Done. The system displays a small double-computer icon in the lower right portion of your screen. 6 7 8 9 10 Double click the double-computer icon. The system displays the connection’s Dialup Status box. Click on the Details tab. Note the Server IP address. Open a telnet session to the S8300: Type telnet, where is the Server IP address as noted in the Dialup Status box from Step 9. 11 Access SAT or use the CLI commands as needed. Use Avaya Terminal Emulator for LAN Connection to Communication Manager You can download the Avaya Terminal Emulator from the Integrated Management main menu. Simply click Download next to the Administration menu item and follow the instructions. Once the Terminal Emulator is installed on your PC, use the following steps to establish a LAN connection to your Media Server. NOTE: The remote dial-up PC must be configured for PPP access. 54 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 1 Double-click the Terminal Emulator icon off of your desktop. Alternatively, go to the Start menu, select Programs, then select Avaya, and finally select Terminal Emulator. The system displays the Terminal Emulator. 2 From the menu bar across the top of the screen, select Phones, then select Connection List. The system displays the Connections window. 3 From the menu bar across the top, select Connection, then select New Connection. The system displays the Connection Settings window. 4 5 6 Put in a name for the connection. Usually, this will be the name of your Media Server. In the Host window, click Telnet. Click the Emulation tab at the top. The system displays the Emulation tab. 7 From the Emulator dragdown box, select the emulator you desire, usually 513BCT (default), AT&T 4410, AT&T or DECVT100. 8 9 In the Keyboard window, select pbx. Click the Network tab. The system displays the Network tab. 10 11 12 In the IP address field, type the IP address of the Media Server. In the TCP/IP port number field, leave 23 if you want to log in at the Linux command line. Type 5023 if you want to log in directly to the Communication Manager SAT command line. Click OK. The Connection Settings window disappears. 13 On the Connections window, double-click. the name of the connection you just set up. If you used port 5023, the Login prompt for the Communication Manager software appears. If you used port 23, the Login prompt for the S8300 Linux software appears. 14 Log in to Communication Manager to access the SAT command prompt screen. If you are logging in as craft, you log in to the S8300 Linux software. Then, see Open the Replace variable w/ ProductName SAT Screens on page 62. Use Avaya Terminal Emulator for Modem Connection to Communication Manager You can download the Avaya Terminal Emulator from the main menu for Integrated Management. Simply click Download next to the Administration menu item and follow the instructions. Once the Terminal Emulator is installed on your PC, use the following steps to establish a LAN connection to your Media Server. 1 Double-click the Terminal Emulator icon off of your desktop. Alternatively, go to the Start menu, select Programs, then select Avaya, and finally select Terminal Emulator. The system displays the Terminal Emulator. 2 From the menu bar across the top of the screen, select Phones, then select Connection List. The system displays the Connections window. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 55 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 3 From the menu bar across the top, select Connection, then select New Connection. The system displays the Connection Settings window. 4 5 6 Put in a name for the connection. Usually, this will be the name of your Media Server. In the Host window, click Telnet. Click the Emulation tab at the top. The system displays the Emulation tab. 7 From the Emulator dragdown box, select the emulator you desire, usually 513BCT (default), AT&T 4410, AT&T or DECVT100. 8 9 In the Keyboard window, select pbx. Click the Modem tab. The system displays the Modem tab. 10 In the IP address field, type the IP address of the connection’s Dialup Status box as noted in Step 9 on page 54. 11 In the TCP/IP port number field, leave 23 if you want to log in at the Linux command line. Type 5023 if you want to log in directly to the Communication Manager SAT command line. 12 13 14 15 In the Modem field, use the dragdown box to select the type of modem that your PC uses. In the Serial port field, select the COM port you are using for your modem connection. In the Baud rate field, select 9500 from the dragdown box. Click the Dial Numbers tab. The system displays the Display Numbers tab. 16 Type the phone number of the Media Server as appropriate. Enter 1 in the Country Code field for long-distance. 17 18 Click OK. On the Connections window, double-click. the name of the connection you just set up. The PC dials up the Media Server, and when connected, the login prompt for the Communication Manager software appears. 19 Log in to Communication Manager to access the SAT command prompt screen. If you are logging in as craft, you log in to the S8300 Linux software. Then, see Open the Replace variable w/ ProductName SAT Screens on page 62. Log in Methods This section describes how to log on to the S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Servers using Telnet or the built-in Web Interface and how to start a SAT session. These procedures assume: • You have a crossover cable directly connected from your laptop to the Services port on the media server and your laptop is configured for a direct connection • Or, you are connected to the S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server over the customer’s LAN, either remotely or on site. In this case, your laptop must be configured to connect to the customer’s LAN and you would use the LAN IP address of the S8300 instead of 192.11.13.6. The last procedure in this section describes logging in to the P330 stack processor when you have a direct serial connection to the G700 Console port. 56 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods Log in to the Media Server from Your Laptop using Telnet To run telnet: 1 Make sure you have an active Ethernet or serial connection from your computer to the Media Server. 2 Access the telnet program; for example: — On a Windows system, go to the Start menu and select Run. — Type telnet 192.11.13.6 to access the media server CLI. 3 4 5 When the login prompt appears, type the appropriate user name (such as cust or craft). 6 Enter your terminal type. Accept the default value, or enter the appropriate type for your computer. For example, you may use type ntt, a terminal type available for Windows NT4.0 or Windows 98. For Windows 2000, use w2ktt. 7 If prompted for a high-priority session, typically answer n. When prompted, enter the appropriate password. If you log in as craft, you are prompted to suppress alarm origination. Generally you should accept the default value (yes). The system displays the telnet prompt. It may take the form . Log in to the S8300 Web Interface from Your Laptop To run the Web Interface: 1 2 Open Internet Explorer (5.5 or later) on your computer. In the Address (or Location) field of your browser, type the 192.11.13.6 (or, for a LAN connection, the IP address of the media server on the customer LAN) and press Enter. If your browser does not have a valid security certificate, you will see a warning screen and instructions to load the security certificate. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 57 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 3 58 The system displays the Welcome screen. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 4 5 Click the Continue button. Accept the Client Authentication and Security Certificate to access the Login screen. The system displays the Login screen. 6 7 Log in as craft. Select yes for Suppress Alarm Origination. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 59 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods The system displays the main menu for the Integrated Management Suite. 8 Click on the link for Launch Maintenance Web Interface The system displays the S8300 main menu in the left panel and a usage-agreement notice in the right window. 60 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods S8300 Main Menu 9 Check the top of the left panel. — The Avaya media server you are logged into is identified by name and server number. — The S8300 media server number is always 1. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 61 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods Open the Replace variable w/ ProductName SAT Screens To run SAT: 1 If you already have a valid telnet session in progress, access the SAT program by typing sat or dsat at the telnet prompt. Or, to open SAT directly from your laptop, click Start > Run and type telnet 192.11.13.6 5023 and press Enter. 2 Log in to the Replace variable w/ ProductName as craft or dadmin. Enter your login confirmation information as prompted: — Password prompt. Type your password in the Password field, and click Login or press Enter again. — ASG challenge. If the login is Access Security Gateway (ASG) protected, you will see a challenge screen. Enter the correct response and click Login or press Enter. 3 Enter your terminal type. Accept the default value, or enter the appropriate type for your computer. For example, you may use type ntt, a terminal type available for Windows NT4.0 or Windows 98. For Windows 2000, use w2ktt. The system displays the SAT interface. 4 Enter SAT commands as appropriate. Log in to the P330 stack Processor with a Direct Connection to the Services Port NOTE: If you are upgrading an S8300/G700 remotely, connect to the customer LAN and telnet to the IP address of the P330 stack master (that is, the P330 stack processor running as the stack master). The IP address is the address assigned on the customer LAN, not 192.11.13.6. 1 With a direct connection to the S8300 services port, telnet to the S8300 IP address: Type telnet 192.11.13.6. 2 3 Login as craft or cust. Telnet to the P330 stack master stack processor. Type telnet , where is the IP address of the P330 stack master processor on the customer’s LAN. 4 Login at the Welcome to Avaya P330 screen. Login: xxx from the planning documentation Password: xxx from the planning documentation You are now logged-in at the Supervisor level. The prompt appears as P330-1(super)#. NOTE: To check the syntax of a command in the command line interface, type as much of the command as you know followed by help. For example: P330-1(super)#> set help 62 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods you will be given the current list of set commands available. If you type: P330-1(super)#> set interface help you will be given a much more restricted list of command possibilities that address the possible interfaces to be set. For a complete list of command line interface commands, type help or refer to the "Avaya P330 User’s Guide" (available at www.avaya.com/support). Log in to the P330 Stack Processor with a LAN Connection 1 With a connection to the customer’s LAN (either remotely or on site), telnet to the P330 stack processor IP address: Type telnet , where is the IP address of the P330 stack master processor on the customer’s LAN. 2 Login at the Welcome to Avaya P330 screen. Login: xxx from the planning documentation Password: xxx from the planning documentation You are now logged-in at the Supervisor level. The prompt appears as P330-1(super)#. Log in to the P330 Stack Processor with a Direct Serial Connection Use this procedure to access the G700 processors when your laptop is directly connected to the Console port via a serial cable. To access the G700 via the Console (serial) port 1 Launch Windows® HyperTerminal or any other terminal emulation program. NOTE: For most Windows-based PCs, you access the HyperTerminal program from the Start menu by selecting Programs, then Accessories. 2 Choose Call - Connect (for HyperTerminal) or the appropriate call command for your terminal emulation program. 3 Login at the Welcome to Avaya P330 screen. Login: xxx from the planning documentation Password: xxx from the planning documentation You are now logged-in at the Supervisor level. The prompt appears as P330-1(super)#. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 63 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods Log in to the P330 Stack Processor with Device Manager To access the Device Manager, you must have access to the corporate LAN in which the P330 Stack Processor resides. Then, to access Device Manager, do the following: 1 Open a compatible Internet browser on your computer. Currently this includes Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher) and Netscape Navigator 4.7 and 6.2. The Java Plug-in 1.2.2 or 1.3.1 is required. 2 In the Address (or Location) field of your browser, type the IP address or name of the P330 Stack Processor and press Enter. — If the network includes a domain name service (DNS) server that has been administered with this IP device’s name, you can type the processor's name into the address field instead of the IP address. For example, http://P330-stack1.mycompany.com NOTE: The Device Manager is not available through the S8300 Media Server. You must be connected to either the P330 Stack Processor or G700 Media Gateway processor through the corporate LAN. 3 A GUI rendering of the stack devices appears. Proceed with Media Gateway or stack device administration. Avaya Site Administration Avaya Site Administration is part of the Avaya Integrated Management Standard Plus package. Normally, the customer can simply select Download next to the Administration item on the Media Server Home Page to download Avaya Site Administration. The customer then follows the directions presented by the download/installation wizard. Configure Avaya Site Administration When Avaya Site Administration is initially installed on a client machine, it needs to be configured to communicate with Communication Manager on the S8300 Media Server. When it runs initially, after downloading, you need to create a new entry for the switch connection. To create new entries for the switch, follow the procedure Adding an S8300 Switch Administration Item on page 64. Adding an S8300 Switch Administration Item 1 Click File > New > Voice System. The system displays the Add Voice System window. 64 2 Enter a name in the Voice System Name: field. As a technician configuring Avaya Site Administration on your laptop, use a generic name, as you will be able to use this connection item for all S8300 Media Servers. 3 4 5 6 Click Next. The connection type dialog box displays. Click the Network connection radio button. Click Next. The Network Connection dialog box displays. Enter the IP address used to connect to the S8300. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Connection and Login Methods 7 8 Click Next. The Network Connection/Port Number dialog box displays. 9 Click Next. The Network Connection/Timeout Parameters dialog box displays. Leave the default values for the timeout parameters. 10 11 12 13 14 TCP/IP Port Number: For the port number, ALWAYS use port 23 for the craft login. Use port 5023 for the customer login. Click Next. The login type dialog box displays. Click the “I want to login manually each time” radio button. Click Next. The switch summary dialog box displays. Check the information, use the Back button to make corrections if necessary, and click the Test button to test the connection. When the connection is successfully tested, click Next and then Finish. Logging in to the S8300 with ASA To start Avaya Site Administration, click Start > Programs > Avaya > Site Administration. Avaya Site Administration supports a terminal emulation mode, which is directly equivalent to SAT command interface. Avaya Site Administration also supports a whole range of other features, including the GEDI and Data Import. For more information refer to the Online Help, Guided Tour, and Show Me accessed from the Avaya Site Administration Help menu. To use Avaya Site Administration, open the application and select the switch (media server) you want to access. When prompted, log in. When you are logged in, click Start GEDI. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 65 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Navigational Aid for CLI Commands Navigational Aid for CLI Commands This section describes a few Command Line Interface commands that you will need to navigate between the processors on the G700. Log in to the P330 stack processor. Default mode is "Supervisor" with a P330-1(super)# command-line prompt. Command Purpose Prompt super change to supervisor mode P330-y(super)# or -y(super)# where xxx is the media gateway number assigned on the "add media-gateway" form, and y is the "module number" of the G700 in the stack. configure change to configuration mode P330-1(configure)# or -1(configure)# session mgp open a CLI session on the mgp processor -1(super)# open a CLI session on the stack processor P330-1(super)# open a CLI session on the S8300 processor craft@ > session <#> open a session on the stack processor in module (i.e. another G700)<#> in the stack P330-<#>(super)# exit close the current session (and revert to the previous session) help displays help for (from a stack processor session) session stack (from an MGP session) session icc (from an MGP session) The command-line prompts in an MGP session use the media gateway’s name that is assigned when it is configured. You can telnet to another processor from a current telnet session. 66 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Roadmap and Reference Terminal Emulation Function Keys for Communication Manager Terminal Emulation Function Keys for Communication Manager When you log in to the Communication Manager SAT screens, your terminal emulation may not display function keys on the screen to help you determine which function keys to press. Use the following table as a guide for ntt terminal emulation. Key Sequence Function Key Function ESC (alpha O) P F1 Cancel ESC (alpha O) Q F2 ESC (alpha O) R F3 ESC (alpha O) S F4 ESC (alpha O) T F5 Help ESC (alpha O) U F6 Go to Page "N" ESC (alpha O) V F7 Next Page ESC (alpha O) W F8 Previous Page Execute The following table lists key presses for w2ktt terminal emulation. Key Sequence Function Key Function ESC F1 Cancel x ESC ESC F2 e ESC ESC F3 Execute F4 h ESC F5 Help F6 ESC n F7 Next Page ESC p F8 Previous Page Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 67 1 1 Roadmap and Reference Terminal Emulation Function Keys for Communication Manager 68 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server The Avaya G700 Media Gateway is part of a family of components that provides data, voice, fax, and messaging services over an IP network. Its standards-based IP communications infrastructure allows high reliability of critical applications and multi-service networking with feature transparency. The G700 can be controlled by an Avaya S8300, S8500, S8700 Media Server running Avaya Communication Manager. The G700 with a call controller converges the power of the Communication Manager with the power of distributed switching from the Avaya P330 product line to support stackable, redundant architectures. Configurations using the G700 consist of three main elements: the G700 Media Gateway, the S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server, and Avaya Communication Manager. This chapter is organized in two main sections: Getting Started - Describes the G700 and S8300 components. Installation and Cabling. - Provides hardware installation and cabling procedures. NOTE: See Quick Start: Avaya G700 Media Gateway Hardware Installation, 555-233-150, for an overview of the G700 hardware and cabling. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 69 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Getting Started Getting Started This section describes the components of an Avaya G700 Media Gateway and an Avaya S8300 Media Server. G700 Media Gateway The main elements of a G700 Media Gateway are: (1) the G700 chassis and processors, (2) the media modules, and (3) the Avaya Data Expansion Modules. Figure 1: G700 Media Gateway with an S8300 Media Server: Front View Figure notes 1 2 Media module slot #1 (V1) 3 4 5 6 S8300 USB ports S8300 services port (used with cross-over ethernet cable) 7 8 9 Media module slot #3 (V3) Media module slot #4 (V4) Console interface Expansion module slot 10/100 Base-T Ethernet ports (ext1, ext2) media module slot #2 (V2) G700 Media Gateway Chassis and Processors The G700 Media Gateway chassis is a 19-inch, 2u rack-mountable unit modeled after the Avaya P330 stackable switching products. A partial list of technical specifications of the G700 appears in Appendix A, “Technical Information”. The G700 has three internal processors: • P330 stack processor (also known as Layer 2 switching processor) • Media gateway processor (MGP) • Voice over IP (VoIP) processor NOTE: An AC/DC version of the G700 will be available 1st-Quarter 2004. 70 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Getting Started Media Modules Media modules are optional, plug-in circuit assemblies. They provide traditional interfacing of service provider network access solutions (such as T1/E1) and connections to TDM-based endpoints (such as DCP digital phones and analog phones). The available media modules are (as shown in Figure 2, Media modules, on page 71): Figure 2: Media modules 1 SO ALM TST ACT SIG EI SM EM SI EO E1/T1 2 ALM TST ACT 3 ALM TST ACT 4 5 EIA 530A DCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ALM TST ACT ALM TST ACT 8 mmdc7 KLC 082202 1 2 3 4 5 Avaya MM710 T1/E1 Media Module Avaya MM760 VoIP Media Module for additional VoIP resources Avaya MM711 Analog Media Module for connection to 8 analog stations or CO trunks Avaya MM712 DCP Media Module for connection to 8 DCP stations Avaya MM720 BRI Media Module for connection to 8 ports for international BRI trunks For detailed descriptions of the media modules see Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. NOTE: A shielded cable for the MM710 Media Module is required to meet emission requirements in European Union countries. The use of a shielded cable for the MM710 is preferred for installations worldwide. The media modules enable the G700, with its primary controller, to host a variety of functions ranging from IP phones to traditional analog telephony ports. The media modules contain trunk or line interfaces and their associated circuitry. Each of the four media module slots has access to the 512-time-slot TDM bus, a 10/100 base T port, power (+5V, -48 V phantom) and ground. Each media module can be accessed and reset from the G700 Media Gateway Processor (MGP) or from the primary controller, and its status is indicated by an LED display. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 71 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Getting Started Data Expansion Modules The G700 Media Gateway can accommodate any of the Avaya™ Data Expansion Modules. With expansion modules, customers can add additional LAN and WAN access modules directly to the G700. Figure 3: Expansion Module (example) X330W-4DS1 ALM TST ACT SYN 1 2 3 4 E1/T1 CONSOLE ETH WAN RJ45 RJ45 RJ48 RSDETV 1 2 3 4 h1dcdmod KLC 030102 Two expansion modules that the customer may purchase are: • Avaya X330 WAN Access Routing Module • Avaya P330 LAN Expansion Module The Avaya X330 WAN Access Routing Module Customers with multiple branch offices need network solutions that are simple, flexible, and scalable. These customers may purchase the Avaya™ X330 WAN Access Routing Module as part of their configuration. This WAN Access Module provides WAN routing to the P330. The Avaya X330 WAN Access Routing Module can be managed by three methods: • Integrated Web-based management • Avaya MultiService Network Manager • Command Line Interface (CLI) The Avaya X330 WAN Access Routing Module provides WAN access that can be used with external firewalls or VPN Gateways. The Avaya P330 LAN Expansion Module Another Data Expansion that customers might purchase as part of their network is the Avaya™ P330 LAN Expansion Module. Features of this Data Expansion Module include: • • • • • 72 Maximum flexibility to the data stack Standard auto-negotiation Link Aggregation Group (LAG) LAG redundancy Link redundancy Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Getting Started • Congestion control • 802.1Q/p VLAN priority CAUTION: Avaya Expansion Modules and Octaplane Stacking Modules are not hot-swappable. The G700 Media Gateway must be turned off before you remove or insert an Expansion Module. If there is an S8300 present that is also turned on, the S8300 should be shut down first, by pressing the Shutdown button until the OK to Remove LED shows a steady light. S8300 LED Indicators A set of LED indicators the faceplate of the S8300 are separate from those of the G700. A shutdown button is also on the faceplate, which when depressed for about three seconds, will shut down the system, including the operating software on the S8300. The LED flashes when shutdown is in progress and remains on steady when it is safe to remove the S8300 or to power down. The functions of the other LEDs are: • The red Major Alarm indicator on the S8300 is off when the system is operational unless a Major Alarm has been raised. • The green Test LED on the S8300 is on when a test is in progress. • The yellow ACT LED on the S8300 is on whenever a G700, an IP telephone, or an IP console is registered with the S8300. It is off when none of these IP endpoints are registered. • The green OK-to-Remove LED on the S8300 indicates that shutdown is complete and that it is safe to remove the server or power down the system. When the S8300 is a local survivable processor (LSP), no LEDs will be lit during normal operations. In case of a network failure or loss of contact with the primary S8300 (or S8500 or S8700), the G700 Media Gateway will register with the LSP. At that time, the red Alarm LED will light. When you first power up the S8300, the red Major Alarm LED will be lit. During startup, an LED test will run, after which all LEDs will be off. At this point, you can connect to the S8300. There will be another flash of LEDs when Communication Manager starts. Media Servers Each G700 is associated with a primary call controller. The primary controller may be an S8300, S8500, or S87 00 Media Server. The S8300 is on a circuit pack that is always installed in slot V1 of a G700. The S8500 or S8700 is housed in a separate box that connects to the G700 over a network through a C-LAN circuit pack. Both media servers can support multiple G700s. The S8300 Media Servers can be configured as either a primary server or a Local Survivable Processors (LSP). The G700 with a media server supports the entire range of adjuncts and peripheral equipment supported by Communication Manager. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 73 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Getting Started Figure 4: Avaya S8300 Media Server S8300 Media Server The S8300 Media Server is an Intel processor complex that mounts in the first media module slot (V1) of the G700 Media Gateway. The S8300 Media Server has: • • • • • • • • Avaya™ Communication Manager (For a full description see: http://www.avaya.com/support) Administration and maintenance provisioning software 20 G hard drive (40 G available January 2004) 256 MB RAM (512 MB available January 2004) Web server Linux OS (Redhat) Support of H.248 and H.323 Protocols TFTP server and other IP services A new version of the S8300 is expected to be available January 2004. The S8300B will be backward compatible with current version and will have a 40 G hard drive and 512 MB RAM (in two 256 MB DIMM strips). Local Survivable Processor (LSP) The S8300 Media Server can act as a survivable call-processing server for remote or branch customer locations. As an LSP, the S8300 Media Server carries a complete set of Communication Manager features, and its license file allows it to function as a survivable call processor. If the link between the remote G700 Media Gateways and the primary controller is broken, those telephones and G700s that are designated to receive backup service from the LSP will register with the LSP. The LSP will provide control to those registered devices in a license error mode (see Hardware Guide for Avaya™ Communication Manager). S8500 Media Server The G700 Media Gateway can be controlled by an external S8500 Media Server. The S8500 is connected to the G700 over the network through a C-LAN circuit pack in the G600, SCC1, or MCC1. 74 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Getting Started S8700 Media Server The G700 Media Gateway can be controlled by an external S8700 Media Server (sometimes referred to as an ECC configuration). Both the S8700 with the G600 Media Gateway (IP Connect) and the 8700 with the SCC1 or the MCC1 Media Gateways (MultiConnect) can control the G700. The S8700 is connected to the G700 over the network through a C-LAN circuit pack in the G600, SCC1, or MCC1. Information on installing the G700 using the S8500 or S8700 as the primary controller can be found in Chapters 4 and 6 in this book. Endpoint and Adjunct Components Additional components and adjunct systems provide sets of tools that allow the customer to obtain the best possible performance. Other components and adjunct systems that make up the S8300 Media Server with a G700 Media Gateway include: • • • • • • • • • • • • Analog phones and fax machines DCP phones IP phones IP Softphones LAN Ethernet switches Avaya Integrated Management INTUITY AUDIX LX Messaging System IA 770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Application ASAI Co-Resident DEFINITY LAN Gateway (DLG) Call Center Uninteruptible Power Supply (UPS) Universal Serial Bus (USB) Modems See "Chapter 8, “Connecting Telephones and Adjunct Systems” or Avaya Communication Manager, Avaya DEFINITY®Servers, and Avaya S8100 Media Server Library CD, 555-245-801, for more information on installing adjuncts. Plan the Installation In the following sections of this installation guide, you will be guided through the installation of several configurations. Before the G700 components are physically installed on the customer’s site, several steps will already have been completed to assure that the actual installation will go smoothly: • Sales personnel have verified that the product is suited to the customer’s application. • Planning and implementation personnel have conducted preliminary inspections of the site and of the other equipment to assure that the S8300/G700 solution will operate at its full potential. • A data network readiness assessment has been completed to assure that the solution will function optimally within the customer’s network. Each of these processes have been documented before the installation. You should verify that you have all the necessary information before going to the site (see Appendix B, “Information Checklists”). Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 75 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Getting Started Use the Planning Documentation To guide you in your preparations for the installation, use the Installer’s Checklists (see Appendix B, “Information Checklists”) to verify that you have the tools, software, and information that you need to install the G700. The planning documentation will provide you with information about: • • • • • • • • What equipment you will be installing What kind of system you will be integrating Whom to contact on site about delivery, system questions, or network concerns Whom to contact at your home office in case of questions Whether you need a special pass or an escort How to gain entrance to the installation location if it is locked Where to install equipment Where to find a telephone near the installation location SSO Authentication Login You should obtain a personal Single Sign-On (SSO) for Remote Feature Activation (RFA) website authentication login before going to the site for installation. You must complete the authentication process before you can be assigned an SSO authentication login. As a first-time user: • Business Partners should point their browsers to the Business Partner portal option sales_market, services-voice, training tools and procedures to select RFA (or go directly to: http://rfa.avaya.com). • Associates should point their browsers to the Avaya Associate portal (or go directly to: http://rfa.avaya.com). • Contractors should point their browsers to Avaya.com (or go directly to: http://rfa.avaya.com). From that point, log into SSO and complete the process to obtain your personal login. Site Verification A pre-installation site inspection allows you to verify that the site requirements have been met for adequate environmental conditions, power and grounding availability, safety, and security conditions. If you find discrepancies between the specifications necessary for proper installation of equipment and the conditions on site, contact your Project Manager before proceeding with the installation. 76 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Getting Started Network Integration Integration into the customer’s network will require coordination with the network manager and the planning and implementation personnel. They will ascertain the customer’s need for DHCP service and the intended network configuration and applications. In addition, Avaya offers Network Readiness services to assist in evaluating and preparing the network for all configurations. The Project Manager will provide information to be used by the installers. The documentation must include dial plans and other telephony information, as well as IP addresses, IP masks, and other network information. This information will be specific to each customer. To install the solution in an efficient manner, you must collect and organize this information before going to the site. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 77 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Installation and Cabling The Avaya G700 Media Gateways can be installed in a variety of configurations: • as a standalone unit with one G700 • with multiple G700 Media Gateways in a stack • in combinations of Media Gateways and Avaya P330 family devices. Up to ten G700 Media Gateways and/or Avaya P330s devices can be combined in a single stack. The G700s can be controlled by an Avaya S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server. In a typical installation, you will arrive at the site equipped with all the tools and information needed to install a G700 and, possibly, an S8300. You will complete the following procedures: Installation Process Steps On Site Checklist on page 78 Unpack and Check the Order on page 79 Install the G700 Media Gateway on page 80 Cable Multiple Units on page 89 Attach Ground Conductors on page 92 NOTE: When installing a G700, complete all tasks in this chapter to install the gateway before doing the media server administration (e.g., add media-gateway). On Site Checklist When you reach the customer's site, you should have each item on the Installer’s Checklist (see Appendix B, “Information Checklists”.) However, it is recommended that you consult with the customer network manager for IP and DNS addressing, as well as for testing the installation. Also, before proceeding with the installation, you should verify that the proper environmental and safety conditions exist. Environmental Verification Verify that temperatures and clearances are within the recommended technical parameters. Consult the table of Technical Specifications in Appendix A, “Technical Information”. CAUTION: Verify that temperature and clearance ranges are within tolerable limits. The thermal sensors may shut down equipment if it is subjected to conditions beyond the recommended limits. Equipment can be damaged if these restrictions are not respected. 78 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Power Verification Check that an adequate number of power outlets are available.Verify that the G700 Media Gateways and the other equipment in the rack do not present a possible overcurrent or overload to the customer’s branch circuit and/or power distribution strip. Power requirements are listed in Appendix A, “Technical Information”. ! WARNING: Do not overload the power circuit. Grounding Verification Ensure that the installation site has access to approved grounds and that either a trained technician or a licensed electrician will be verifying all grounds and installing the Supplementary Ground Conductor (consult Attach Ground Conductors). ! WARNING: Installation in a Restricted Access Location and secure access are required in Finland and Norway. The G700 Media Gateway relies on two ground connections (mains plug with an earth contact and a permanent Supplementary Ground Conductor). Because of unreliable earthing concerns in Finland and Norway, the G700 Media Gateway must be installed in a Restricted Access Location (RAL). An RAL is defined as an access that can be gained only by trained service personnel or customers who have been instructed about the reasons for the restricted access and any safety precautions that must be taken. In these cases, access to the G700 Media Gateway is gained by the use of a tool (such as a lock and key) or other means of security. If you have any questions about the safety conditions, contact your Project Manager. When you have verified that the site is ready for a safe installation, proceed with the installation. Unpack and Check the Order Cross-check your customer's order with the planning documentation you have been given. media modules, telephones and other equipment are listed on your planning and shipping documentation. Placement for the media modules and other equipment are indicated, as well. Verify that all necessary elements have been received and are in good condition. If there are missing or damaged elements, contact the Project Manager for instructions. The planning documentation will list contact information for the Project Manager and other key personnel. CAUTION: Wear an anti-static wrist ground strap whenever handling components of an Avaya™ G700 Media Gateway. Connect the strap to an approved ground, such as an unpainted metal surface. If you have any questions about the equipment order, or if the equipment has been damaged, contact your Project Manager. When you have verified that the order is complete and that you have all of the necessary components and tools, proceed with the installation. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 79 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Install the G700 Media Gateway After you have verified the site conditions and the shipment, you will proceed with the installation of the hardware. Figure 5: Avaya G700 Media Gateways EI SM EM 1 SO 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EI SM EM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EI SM EM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ALM TST ACT SIG SI EO E1/T1 EIA 530A DCE ALM TST ACT ALM TST ACT SO ALM TST ACT SIG SI EO E1/T1 EIA 530A DCE ALM TST ACT ALM TST ACT SO ALM TST ACT SIG SI EO E1/T1 ALM TST ACT OK TO REMOVE EIA 530A DCE ALM TST ACT SHUT DOWN SERVICES USB 1 USB 2 ALM TST ACT EI SM EM 1 SO 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ALM TST ACT SIG SI EO E1/T1 EIA 530A DCE ALM TST ACT ALM TST ACT scdcrck4 LAO 030203 Figure 5, Avaya G700 Media Gateways, on page 80 shows a stack of four G700 Media Gateways installed in a rack-mounted configuration. Of the four G700s, only one contains an S8300 Media Server in slot V1 (second up from the bottom). 80 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Prepare the G700 Media Gateway The instructions that follow guide you through a process of preparing the Avaya™ G700 Media Gateway after you have mounted the empty chassis in the rack. It is possible to equip an empty G700 chassis before positioning it in the rack. If you are working where space is limited, you may wish to prepare the G700 before rack insertion. CAUTION: When handling any components of an S8300 Media Server with G700 Media Gateways, wear an anti-static wrist ground strap. Connect the strap to an approved ground such as an unpainted metal surface. The G700 can stand on a flat surface or be mounted in the standard 19-inch rack. If the G700 is to be mounted in a rack, you have the choice of fastening the unit to the rack either at the front of the unit or at the middle. This positioning choice will depend on space arrangements. In either case, mounting brackets must be attached to the sides of the chassis, either at the center or to the front of the chassis. Affix Mounting Brackets to the G700 1 2 3 4 5 Remove the screws from the bracket kit. Position a bracket over the desired mounting position. Affix the bracket to the chassis with the screws provided. Tighten with the screwdriver. Repeat on the other side. If the G700 is to be a table-top unit, four feet must be attached to the bottom of the unit. The procedure to do this is the following: Affix Feet on the Table-Top G700 Use this procedure only if the G700 will be installed as a table-top unit (not in a data rack). 1 2 3 4 Remove the four feet from their packaging. Turn the G700 Media Gateway over to allow the feet to be mounted. Position one foot into the mounting site near the corner of the chassis. Press the plastic rivet into the foot with a stylus until it is firmly seated on the chassis. You have now prepared the G700 Media Gateway for mounting, and, assuming you are going to use a data rack, you are ready to mount the chassis in the rack. Mount the G700 Media Gateway in the Rack The G700 Media Gateway mounts in a standard 19-inch rack. It is held in place by screws through the two mounting ears. The unit can be mounted either in the center of the unit or at the front of the unit; however, only the front mount allows use of the guides for electrical cables. To avoid balancing problems and cabling complications, the racks should be filled from the bottom; that is, mount units in the lower positions first. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 81 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Before mounting the G700, check for the following: • Ensure that the rack is bolted to the floor and is earthquake-protected, if required. If the rack is not securely fixed in place, do not proceed with the installation. • If the G700 is being mounted in a rack with other equipment already installed, the G700 must be positioned to avoid imbalance. • The G700 is shipped with 3 sets of four mounting screws. Choose the set of screws that match the screw holes in the rack being used. • The G700 weighs 22.5 pounds (10 kg) empty and between 27 and 34 pounds (between 12 and 16 kg) when equipped with media modules. Two people may be needed to mount the G700 Media Gateway in the rack. Figure 6: Rack Mounting Mount the G700 Media Gateway in the Rack 1 2 3 4 5 6 82 Position the G700 in the rack. Assure that there is adequate ventilation. Verify that the screw holes are aligned with the rack hole positions. Insert the mounting screws. Use two screws on each side. Tighten the mounting screws. Avoid overtightening. Verify that ventilation vents are not obstructed. Repeat to add other G700 Media Gateways to the rack as described in the planning documents. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling If you are installing multiple G700s, continue building the stack. Up to 10 units can be linked together (Figure 13, Cabling Multiple Units in a Single Rack, on page 90); these may be G700s or Avaya P330 family switches. At this point, you have mounted the G700 chassis in the rack and are ready to insert S8300 Media Servers and media modules as required in the planning documentation. Insert the Avaya S8300 Media Server (If Necessary for Standalone Service or LSP) The S8300 Media Server is inserted into the G700 Media Gateway slot #1 (v1), whether it is the primary server or configured as a Local Survivable Processor (LSP). The S8300 can only be inserted in the slot (v1) on the left side of the G700 Media Gateway. The LED module must be pulled from the G700 chassis to provide clearance for the S8300 Media Server. NOTE: If you need to install the CWY1 card (for embedded messaging) on the S8300, do so now. CAUTION: If you are removing an S8300, use the shutdown button to stop the operating system (press and hold for 2-3 seconds). The OK to Remove LED will flash while the shutdown is in progress and will turn steady green when it is safe to remove the S8300. Insert the S8300 into Slot #1 of the G700 Media Gateway 1 Clear the left side of the G700 Media Gateway. a Remove the blank plate from slot #1. b Then, disengage the LED module and remove it from the G700 Media Gateway. 2 Line up the Avaya S8300 Media Server module squarely with its bay opening. Figure 7: Clear the left side of the G700 Media Gateway 3 Engage both sides of the S8300 Media Server module in the interior guides and guide the module halfway into the chassis. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 83 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Figure 8: Insert S8300 4 Align the LED module in its guides and gently push it into place, keeping the LED module safely within its guides and maintaining an even pressure to assure that the module does not become twisted or disengage from the guides. Guide the longer, left side of the LED module into the chassis until the shorter, right edge of the module can engage in its guides. Figure 9: Align the LED module and the S8300 Media Server 5 Push steadily and firmly until the faceplates of the S8300 Media Server and the LED module are even and then push the two units into the housing together. 6 Apply firm pressure to engage the connectors. The connector has different length pins. The long pins will engage first to provide grounding. Medium length and short pins will provide power and signal. 7 Tighten the captive screws on the S8300 Media Server module. ! WARNING: To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure continued compliance to radiated emissions requirements, all captive screws must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened without the use of a tool. 84 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Figure 10: Tighten screws Insert the Media Modules Following the planning documentation, you can insert the required media modules into their designated bays. The G700 Media Gateway can accommodate up to four media modules, or plug-in circuit packs. The choice of media modules is dictated by the offer selected by the customer and the configuration of the system. Consult the planning documentation and the order form to determine which modules you will be installing. The planning documents also indicate into which slots the modules are to be inserted. The media modules available at this time are: • • • • • Avaya™ MM710 T1/E1 Media Module Avaya™ MM760 VoIP Media Module Avaya™ MM711 Analog Media Module Avaya™ MM712 DCP Media Module Avaya™ MM720 BRI Media Module For detailed descriptions of the media modules see Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication Manager. ! WARNING: The Avaya G700 Media Gateway must not be operated with any slots open. Failure to cover empty slots with the supplied blank plates can cause overheating due to inadequate air distribution. CAUTION: The connector pins can be bent or damaged if the module is handled roughly, or if misaligned and then forced into position. CAUTION: Separate ESD paths to the chassis ground connect to the media modules at the springloaded captive screws. Use a screw driver to ensure the captive screws are securely tightened to prevent damage to the equipment. Insert media modules 1 2 Remove the blank plate from the empty bay. Position the media module squarely before the selected bay on the front of the G700 Media Gateway chassis and engage both sides of the module in the interior guides. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 85 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling 3 Slide the module slowly into the chassis, maintaining an even pressure to assure that the module does not become twisted or disengaged from the guides. Figure 11: Insert Media Module 4 Apply firm pressure to engage the connectors. The media module connector has different length pins. The long pins will engage first to provide grounding. Medium length and short pins will provide power and signal. 5 Lock the media module into the chassis by tightening the spring-loaded captive screws on the front of the module. ! WARNING: To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure continued compliance to international radiated emissions requirements, all captive screws must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened without the use of a tool. ! WARNING: After you have connected telephones to the various media modules, be sure to add circuit protection to the lines (see Complete the Telephone Installation Process on page 331). At this point, you have readied the G700 inserted the S8300 if required, and inserted the media modules, as described in the planning documentation. Next, if required, the Expansion Module should be inserted into its bay. 86 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Insert an Expansion Module The Expansion Modules provide increased networking and connectivity capabilities. These modules may be mounted on the G700 Media Gateway in the slot on the lower left side of the unit below slot V1 (see G700 Media Gateway with an S8300 Media Server: Front View on page 70). CAUTION: The Expansion Module is not hot-swappable. That is, the G700 must be powered off before you insert or remove an Expansion Module. If there is an active S8300 present, the S8300 should be shut down by pressing and holding the Shutdown button for 2-3 seconds. The OK to remove LED will flash during shutdown and turn on steady when it is safe to power down. Insert an Expansion Module into the G700 Media Gateway Turn off the power to the unit if the equipment has been in operation. 1 2 Remove the blank plate covering the bay. Align the printed circuit board with the interior guide rails. NOTE: The printed circuit board fits into the guide rail. The metal base plate does not. 3 4 Firmly press the Expansion Module into the G700 Media Gateway until it is completely inserted. Tighten the two screws on the front panel of the Expansion Module. ! WARNING: To prevent access to electrical hazards by unauthorized personnel and to ensure continued compliance to international radiated emissions requirements, all captive screws must be securely tightened such that they cannot be loosened without the use of a tool. ! WARNING: The Avaya G700 Media Gateway must not be operated with any slot open. Empty slots must be covered with the supplied blank plates. At this point, you have readied the G700, inserted the S8300, if required, inserted the media modules and the Expansion Module, as required in the planning documents. If more than one unit (G700 and/or Level 2 switches and routers) will be connected in the configuration you are installing, the next step will be to insert an Avaya X330STK Stacking Sub-Module. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 87 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Insert an Avaya X330STK Stacking Module G700 Media Gateways can be mounted in equipment stacks with routers, switches, or other G700s. The stack is limited to ten elements. To link multiple units, each G700 must be equipped with an Avaya X330STK Stacking Module, which is mounted through the rear panel (back view) of the G700. CAUTION: The Stacking Sub-Module is not hot-swappable. That is, the G700 must be powered off before you insert or remove a Stacking Module. If there is an active S8300 present, the S8300 should be shut down by pressing the Shutdown button. Hold the button in 2–3 seconds until the OK to Remove LED starts flashing. When the LED turns on steady, power can be safely turned off. Insert an Avaya X330STK Stacking Module 1 2 Remove the blank plate from the back of the G700. Insert the Avaya X330STK Stacking Module gently in the bay in the back of the G700, ensuring that the metal base plate is aligned with the guide rails. Figure 12: Insert Stacking Module in G700 (back view) 3 Press the Avaya X330STK Stacking Module in firmly until the connector at the back of the module is completely inserted into the internal connector on the G700. 4 Tighten the screws on either side of the module. At this point, the required modules and cabling units have been inserted into the G700 Media Gateway. The next step will be to install cabling. 88 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Cable Multiple Units Avaya G700 Media Gateways can be mounted in equipment stacks with routers, switches, or other Media Gateways. These elements are all compatible and are installed similarly. Consult Avaya™ P333T User Guide for installation and cabling information. To link multiple units, each G700 Media Gateway must be equipped with an Avaya X330STK Stacking Module on the rear panel. Then, each unit in the stack is linked to the one above it. Finally, the bottom unit is linked to the top unit. Stacks should always be built from the bottom, and new units should be added at the top. Up to 10 units can be stacked in this way. When deciding where to position the unit, ensure that: • It is accessible and cables can be connected easily. • Cabling is away from sources of electrical noise such as radio transmitters, broadcast amplifiers, power lines and fluorescent lighting fixtures. • Water or moisture cannot enter the case of the unit. • There is a free flow of air around the unit and the vents in the sides of the case are not blocked. The two ends of the Octaplane cables incorporate different connectors. Each connector can only be connected to its matching interface.The following cables are used to connect stacked units: • Short Octaplane cable (Avaya X330SC) - light, ivory-colored cable used to connect adjacent units. • Long Octaplane and Extra-Long Octaplane cables (Avaya X330LC/X330L-LC) - light, ivorycolored cable used to connect units from two different physical stacks or those separated by more than 12 inches (30 cm). • Redundant and Long Redundant cables (Avaya X330RC/X330L-RC) - black cable used to connect the top and bottom switches of a stack. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 89 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Figure 13: Cabling Multiple Units in a Single Rack 2 1 1 Short Octaplane cable (X330SC) 2 Redundant cable (X330RC) cadc2cbl LAO 030203 Connect Units within a Single Stack 1 Connect the light grey connector of the short Avaya X330SC cable (12 in, 30 cm) to the port marked “to upper unit” in the bottom-most stack element. 2 Connect the dark grey connector of the same short X330SC cable to the port marked “to the lower unit” in the unit above. 3 Repeat until you reach the top element in the stack. Up to ten G700s and/or other Cajun devices can be stacked together. To implement stack redundancy: 4 Use the Redundant Cable to connect the port marked “to lower unit” on the bottom element to the port marked “to upper unit” on the top element of the stack. If you have elements of a stack in two racks, you must use the Avaya X330LC cable to connect them. You may not link more than 10 units to form a stack, but those units can be mounted in more than one rack. 90 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Link Elements in Multiple Racks 1 2 Use the long (6ft, 2 m) Avaya X330LC cable to connect elements in two racks. 3 Connect the Avaya X330LC cable (light grey connector) to the port on the last unit in the stack marked “to the upper unit.” Connect the Avaya X330LC cable (dark grey connector) to the port on first unit of the stack marked “to the lower unit.” To implement stack redundancy: 4 Connect the dark grey connector of the black Redundant Cable to the port marked “to lower unit” on the bottom unit of the stack. 5 Connect the light grey connector of the black Redundancy Cable to the port marked “to upper unit” on top unit of the stack. CAUTION: Do not cross-connect two stack elements with two Octaplane (light-colored) cables. If you wish to cross-connect for redundancy, use a black redundancy cable. Figure 14: Linking Units in Multiple Racks X330LC or X330L-LC Cable cadc2stk LAO 030203 You have now mounted the fully equipped Avaya G700 Media Gateway in the rack, and cabled units together as described in the planning documents. When all the units are mounted, and cabled, you are ready to connect to electrical ground conductors. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 91 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Attach Ground Conductors To assure safe installation and operation, carefully read all requirements, recommendations and instructions. Pay special attention to all CAUTION, WARNING, and DANGER statements. ! WARNING: Make sure that the G700 has a reliable earth ground connection, whether it is connected directly to a branch circuit or to a power distribution strip. ! WARNING: Installation in a Restricted Access Location and secure access are required in FInland and Norway. CAUTION: System grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding provided in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70, or the applicable electrical code in the country of installation. General Grounding Requirements For AC Input: Two safety grounds are required to ensure safe operation of the G700 Media Gateway — the ground conductor that is part of the AC power cord and the field-installed green/yellow conductor referred to as the Supplementary Ground Conductor. Both safety grounds must be connected to an approved ground. If a power cord accompanies the G700, use that cord whenever possible. For DC Input: The +48Vdc lead provided for DC power input to the G700 Media Gateway must be grounded at the source to an approved ground. The -48Vdc is the active lead. Both leads must be floating at the input to the G700. In addition, the Supplementary Ground Conductor must be installed on the G700 and connected to an approved ground. The customer must select a location for the G700 Media Gateway installation that is no more than 50 feet (15 m) from an approved ground. If this location requirement is not met, the customer must contact a licensed electrician to install a Supplementary Ground Conductor per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). ! WARNING: If the installation location is greater than 50 feet (15 m) from an approved ground, do not install the Avaya G700 Media Gateway until a licensed electrician is present to install a Supplementary Ground Conductor. A 55-foot (16-m) Supplementary Ground Conductor is provided with the equipment, and is constructed of 10 AWG (4.0 mm2) wire, with an insulated ring terminal crimped to one end that is suitable for the #8 (M4) stud/screw on the rear of the G700 chassis. The customer will need to provide a means of connecting this Supplementary Ground Conductor to an approved ground according to Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). 92 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling A ground block is available for use when multiple G700 Media Gateways are being installed. The ground block, intended for rack mounting, has ten terminals available for terminating Supplementary Ground Conductors. Up to ten G700 Media Gateways can be grounded at the block installed close to the equipment (on a rack) and then a single ground conductor can be routed from the same block to an approved ground. If the ground block is to be used, it must be ordered separately. ! DANGER: Failure to install both grounds will void the Product Safety certifications (UL and the CE Mark) on the product, as well as allow a hazard to be present that could result in death or severe personal injury. Because of unreliable earthing concerns in Finland and Norway, the G700 Media Gateway must be installed in a restricted access location. A restricted access location is defined as access that can be gained by only Service Personnel or Customers who have been instructed about the reasons for the restricted access and any safety precautions that must be taken. In these cases, access to the G700 Media Gateway is gained by the use of a tool (such as a lock and key) or other means of security. ! WARNING: For Installations in Finland and Norway, the Avaya G700 Media Gateway relies on two ground connections (mains plug with an earth contact, and a Supplementary Ground Conductor). Approved Grounds An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building entrance protector, entrance cable shield, or a single-point ground of electronic telephony equipment. If more than one type of approved ground is available on the premises, the grounds must be bonded together as required in Section 250-81 of the NEC for the US or per the local electrical code regulations in the country of installation. • Grounded Building Steel: The metal frame of the building where it is effectively grounded by one of the following grounds: acceptable metallic water pipe, concrete encased ground, or a ground ring. • Acceptable Water Pipe: A metal underground water pipe, at least 1/2-in. (1.3 cm) in diameter, in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 ft. (3m). The pipe must be electrically continuous (or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints, plastic pipe, or plastic water meters) to the point where the protector ground wire connects. A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building, a concrete-encased ground, or a ground ring. If these grounds are not available, the water pipe ground can be supplemented by one of the following types of grounds: — Other local metal underground systems or structures - Local underground structures such as tanks and piping systems. — Rod and pipe electrodes - A 5/8-in. (1.6 cm) solid rod or 3/4-in. (2 cm) conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 ft. (2.4 m). — Plate electrodes - Must have a minimum of 2 sq. ft. (0.185 sq. m) of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil. • Concrete Encased Ground: An electrode encased by at least 2 in. (5.1 cm) of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with the earth. The electrode must be at least 20 ft. (6.1 m) of one or more steel reinforcing bars or rods, 1/2-in. (1.3 cm) in diameter, or at least 20 ft. (6.1 m) of bare solid copper, 4 AWG (26mm2) wire. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 93 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling • Ground Ring: A buried ground that encircles a building or structure at a depth of at least 2.5 ft (0.76 m) below the earth’s surface. The ground ring must be at least 20 ft. (6.1 m) of 2 AWG (35 mm2), bare copper wire. • Approved Floor Grounds: Floor grounds are those grounds on each floor of a high-rise building that are suitable for connection to the ground terminal in the riser closet and to the cabinet singlepoint ground terminal. Approved floor grounds may include the following: — Building steel — The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer feeding the floor — Metallic water pipes. — Power-feed metallic conduit supplying panel boards on the floor. — A grounding point specifically provided in the building for that purpose. ! WARNING: If the approved ground or approved floor ground can only be accessed inside a dedicated power equipment room, then connections to this ground must be made by a licensed electrician. Connect the Safety Ground Proper grounding of the G700 Media Gateway installation safeguards the system, users and service personnel by providing protection from lightning, power surges, AC mains faults, power crosses on central office trunks, and electrostatic discharge (ESD). Local electrical installation codes must be followed when installing G700 Media Gateways. ! WARNING: Connection of both grounds (through the AC or DC Power Cord and the Supplementary Ground Conductor) is required for safe operation of the G700 Media Gateway. ! WARNING: An improper ground can cause electrical shock as well as equipment failures and service outages. Attach the Ground Wires 1 Remove the ground screw on the rear of the chassis adjacent to the ground symbol: 2 3 Place the ring terminal of the 10 AWG (4.0 mm2) Supplementary Ground Conductor on the screw. Replace the ground screw to the chassis and securely tighten the screw such that it cannot be loosened without the use of a tool. If the ground block has been purchased: The ground block is provided for use with more than one G700 (or other Cajun devices) in the rack. It is usually mounted by the customer electrician. 94 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling 4 Cut the Supplementary Ground Conductor (which has one end attached to the grounding screw on the chassis) to the length needed to terminate it into one of the terminals of the ground block. Do not coil the Supplementary Ground Conductor. 5 Attach one end of the remaining 10 AWG (4mm2) ground wire to one of the terminals in the ground block and the other end to an approved ground. 6 Cut this ground wire to the length needed to reach the approved ground. Do not coil this wire. If the ground block is not being used, simply: 7 8 Attach the Supplementary Ground Conductor to an approved ground. Connect the AC power cable to the inlet receptacle on the rear of the chassis. You have now mounted the fully equipped G700 Media Gateway in the rack, cabled units together as described in the planning documents, and connected to electrical ground conductors. When all the units are mounted, cabled, and grounded, you are ready to apply power. Connect AC Power For North American installations, the AC Power Cord terminates on one end with a NEMA-15P plug to connect to the AC main socket-outlet at the wall. For installations in other regions, the plug to be used must comply with the local regulations and be marked as such, be suitable for the current and voltage being used, and contain an earthing pin for connection to ground at the AC mains socket-outlet through the cord. To prevent accidental interruption of power to the G700 Media Gateway, do not connect the G700 Media Gateway to a switch-controlled AC wall socket-outlet. In addition, Avaya Inc. highly recommends that the customer use a UPS for back-up power. Advise your customer to verify through a licensed electrician that the ground connection at the AC outlet to be used is attached to an approved ground. Power Requirements The G700 Media Gateway uses an auto-ranging 100-240 Vac power supply, 50 to 60 Hz, 5 A maximum at 100-120 Vac and 2 A maximum at 200-240 Vac. The AC power source is to be single phase, 3conductor (Line, Neutral and Ground) with a 15 A circuit breaker for 100-120 Vac or a 10 A circuit breaker for 200-240 Vac. Test the AC Outlet ! WARNING: The following recommended test equipment, tests and diagrams are intended only for North American installations at 110 to 125 Volts AC. For installations in other regions, have a licensed electrician verify the ground and voltages. ! WARNING: If the AC outlet tests indicate that the power requirements are not met, your customer must contact a licensed electrician. DO NOT install the system until all requirements are met. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 95 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Fault Conditions If the AC outlet tests that follow reveal any of the following conditions, they must be corrected BEFORE the system is to be installed. • • • • • Open ground Hot and neutral reversed Open hot Open neutral Hot and ground reversed ! WARNING: Hazardous voltages are present during this test. Follow all instructions carefully when working the AC power line voltages. Verify Ground Using an Ideal 61-035 Circuit Tester (or equivalent) 1 Plug the circuit tester into the outlet that you want to test. If the circuit is properly grounded, the yellow and white lights on the tester illuminate. 2 Unplug the tester. ! WARNING: If the tester indicates any type of ground fault, your customer must contact a licensed electrician. DO NOT install the system. Verify Voltages Using a Volt-Ohm Millimeter (VOM) (U.S. and countries using 110 to 125 Vac power) ! WARNING: Hazardous voltages are present during this test. Follow all instructions carefully when working with AC power line voltages. 1 Ensure that the VOM is set to read Volts AC NOTE: The following example is for North American voltages (110 to 125 Vac). Use the appropriate voltages for local power. 2 96 Set the VOM to the lowest scale on which you can read 130 Vac. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling 3 Measure the AC voltages in the following order: 1 2 Phase to neutral should be 110 to 125 Vac. 3 Phase to ground should be 110 to 125 Vac. Neutral to ground should be less than 1 Vac. If the voltage readings do not measure the values given, the AC outlet is improperly wired — DO NOT INSTALL THE SYSTEM. Advise the customer to have a licensed electrician correct the problem. You are now ready to power the system. Plug in AC Power Once the ground and voltages have been verified to be correct for the installation, connect to AC power. 1 2 Plug the power cord into the G700 Plug the power cord into the outlet that was tested. NOTE: There is no On/Off power switch on the G700 Media Gateway. The AC inlet serves as the disconnect device. To disconnect power from the G700 Media Gateway, remove the power cord plug from the AC inlet. The G700 Media Gateway will power up. The LEDs on the media modules, the S8300 Media Server, and the G700 Media Gateway will flash at power-up. Each element will conduct a series of self-tests. 3 The LEDs on the G700 LED panel will flash, and the red ALM LED will light up until the selftests on the G700 Media Gateway have completed. 4 The LEDs on the S8300 Media Server will light as described in the following sequence: a b c d e f g ALM - RED - lights up, then turns off TEST - GREEN – lights up, then turns off ACTIVE - YELLOW – lights up, then turns off OK To REMOVE - GREEN - lights up, then turns off LEFT LED in SERVICES port - GREEN (10 MB link speed) lights up, then turns off LEFT LED in SERVICES port - YELLOW (100 MB link speed) lights up, then turns off RIGHT LED in SERVICES port - GREEN lights up, then turns off When you first power up the S8300, the red Major Alarm LED will be lit. During startup, selftests will run, after which all LEDs will be off. At this point, you can connect to the S8300. There will be another flash of LEDs when Communication Manager starts. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 97 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling 5 Verify that: — media modules: all LEDs are extinguished. NOTE: If the initial administration of all media modules is not completed, an alarm LED will light. — The master LED (labeled MSTR) or the system LED (labeled SYS) lights on one and only one module in the stack. — G700 Media Gateway: the green CPU LED is illuminated when both the P330 stack processor (Layer 2 Switching Processor) and the G700 Media Gateway Processor (MGP) are in a normal operational state. The red ALM LED is illuminated whenever an alarm exists in the G700 Media Gateway Processor. The ALM LED might signal either a hardware failure or a software or firmware condition that could be cleared by resetting the processor. It will also be illuminated because the license file for the S8300 has not yet been installed. Check and Connect DC Power NOTE: The AC/DC version of the G700 will be available 1st-Quarter 2004. Perform this check procedure only if you are installing a G700 that is using the DC input-power option rather than AC input-power. Before you connect the G700 media gateway DC feed cable to the DC power source, check the DC power source using a KS-20599 digital voltmeter (or equivalent). To check DC power: 1 Verify that the meter reads between -41Vdc and -56 Vdc across the -48Vdc and -48V Return distribution leads from the DC source. 2 Verify that the meter reads 0V between the -48V Return lead of the DC power source and the approved ground. 3 If either step 1 or step 2 fails the verification, DO NOT PROCEED with step 4. Request that a qualified electrician resolve the problem. 4 5 Connect the DC feed cable for each G700 to the G700 chassis. Connect the DC feed cable for each G700 to the DC power source. a Connect the red insulated 10 AWG lead to the -48Vdc Return (positive) source. b Connect the black insulated 10 AWG lead to the -48Vdc (negative) source. 98 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling Figure 15: DC Wiring Diagram 1 AWG ground wire DC power cabinet Approved ground 10 AWG To CBC ground terminal bar at the MDF Ground discharge bar Ground connection terminal Battery + 10 AWG RED G700 G650 BLACK 30A System single point ground circuit breaker + DC battery cabinet - -48 V RTN 30A 10 AWG RED -48 V -48 V RTN G700 G650 BLACK -48 VDC - Frame ground Single point ground block -48 V LVD 30A DC power from rectifiers Rectifiers Main AC supply (AC mains) 10 AWG RED 30A 10 AWG BLACK 10 AWG RTN RED 10 AWG BLACK -48 V RTN G700 G65 -48 V To next G700 G650 Green/Yellow Green/Yellow Green/Yellow 6 AWG 10 AWG 10 AWG 10 AWG cydf_dc2 LAO 072403 You have now completed the initial installation of the G700 Media Gateway. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 99 2 2 Installing Hardware for the G700 Media Gateway and S8300 Media Server Installation and Cabling 100 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 This chapter covers the procedures to install a new Avaya G700 Media Gateway with an Avaya S8300 Media Server. The S8300 can be configured as either the primary controller or as a local survivable processor (LSP). The new S8300 ships with the Communication Manager software installed on the hard drive. The G700 ships with the firmware installed on the G700 processors and media modules. However, you may need to upgrade Communication Manager, G700 firmware, and/or media module firmware if the latest available versions are not currently installed. If the S8300 is configured as an LSP, the primary controller, running Avaya Communication Manger, can be either another S8300, or an S8500 or S8700 Media Server. NOTE: Procedures to install or upgrade an S8500 or S8700 Media Server are not covered in this document. See Avaya S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Server Library, which is on the Avaya Support website (http://www.avaya.com/support) or on the CD, 555-233-825. The steps to install an S8300 configured as an LSP are the same as the steps to install an S8300 configured as the primary controller, with the following additional considerations: • The version of Communication Manager on the LSP must be the same as, or later than, the version running on the primary controller. • For an LSP, you administer Communication Manager translations on the primary controller, not on the LSP. The primary controller then copies the translations to the LSP. Tip: The Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) performs tasks automatically starting with Transfer Files from a CD or Laptop on page 111. However, the IW does not install and configure an X330 Expansion module. This task must still be performed as described in this document. In addition, for an S8300 Media Server, IW administers only the Media Gateway screen (add media-gateway). IW also administers only default values for the IP region. Finally, you must define any LSPs on the S8300 Media Server manually using the procedures in this document. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 101 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Installation Overview Installation Overview G700 components A P330 stack processor is built into the G700 Media Gateway. (This processor is also known as the Layer 2 switching processor). The G700 also contains an MGP processor, a VoIP processor, and media modules. Updating the firmware for one or more of these processors and/or media modules is a required part of most S8300 software upgrades. Software and firmware files A new S8300 Media Server should already have a current release of Communication Manager software installed on its hard drive. The G700 components should have current releases of firmware installed. It may be necessary to upgrade the S8300 software to a later release, or to install an update (patch), and/or upgrade the G700 and media module firmware. The file containing the S8300 software and G700 firmware has a *.tar extension. The *.tar file is on a CD-ROM that you take to the site. Additional files that may be needed are the most recent versions of the software update (patch) file and G700 firmware files. You may need to obtain these files from the Avaya Support web site. System Access Initial Access to the G700 Before the P330 stack processor is configured with an IP address, the only way to access it is with a direct connection from your laptop to the Console port on the G700. With this connection, you can assign the IP addresses to the G700 processors, which can then be accessed over the customer LAN. Access to the S8300 and G700 You can access the S8300 and G700 in several ways with either a direct connection or LAN connection. NOTE: Before the Upgrade Tool can be used to upgrade software on an LSP or firmware on a G700, as summarized below, the LSP must be administered on the primary controller. Direct connection to target S8300 If you are at the location of the target S8300 (primary or LSP), you can connect directly to the S8300 Services port and: 1 Upgrade the S8300 software by — Opening the Web interface and using the Avaya Installation Wizard — Or, opening the Web interface and using the main menu 2 102 Upgrade the G700 firmware by Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Installation Overview — Opening the Web interface and using the Upgrade Tool — Or, telnet to the S8300 and then telnet to the P330 stack processor Direct connection to the remote primary server (S8300, S8500, or S8700) In this case, the target S8300 is an LSP. If you are at the remote location of the primary server, you can connect directly to the server’s Services port and: 1 Upgrade the S8300 (LSP) software by — Opening the Web interface and using the Upgrade Tool 2 Upgrade the G700 firmware by — Opening the Web interface and using the Upgrade Tool — Or, telnet to the primary server and then telnet to the P330 stack processor and perform the installation commands For direct connections, the TFTP server must be on the Customer LAN, not on your laptop. LAN connections If you can connect to the customer’s LAN, you can: 1 Upgrade the S8300 software by — Opening the Web interface on the S8300 and using the Avaya Installation Wizard — Or, Opening the Web interface on the S8300 and using the main menu 2 Upgrade the G700 firmware by — Opening the Web interface on the primary server and using the Upgrade Tool — Or, telnet to the P330 stack processor and perform the installation commands For LAN connections the TFTP server can be your laptop or a customer computer on the LAN. See "Connection and Login Methods" in Chapter 1 for details on how to connect and log into the G700. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 103 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Before Going to the Customer Site Before Going to the Customer Site The procedures in this section should be completed before going to the customer site or before starting a remote installation. Off-site Tasks Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager The project manager should provide you with forms that contain all the information needed to prepare for this installation. The information primarily consists of IP addresses, subnet mask addresses, logins, passwords, people to contact, the type of system, and equipment you need to install. Verify that the information provided by the project manager includes all the information requested in your planning forms. Tip: Appendix B, Information Checlists, provides several checklists to help you gather the installation and upgrade information. Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary For an upgrade of an existing G700, the existing license file can usually be reused. However, if the customer is adding feature functionality (for example, adding BRI trunks), or if the upgrade is between major releases (for example, 1.3 to 2.0), you will need the serial number of the G700. To get this number, ask the customer’s administrator to log in to the S8300 web page and select View License Status from the main menu to display the serial number. For a new installation, you need the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway in order to complete the creation of the customer’s license file on the rfa.avaya.com web site. To get this number, look for the serial number sticker on the back of the G700 chassis. If the unit is delivered directly to the customer and you will not have phone or LAN line access from the customer site to access the rfa.avaya.com web site, this task will require a preliminary trip to the customer site. Check FTP Server for Backing up Data During the installation and upgrade procedures, you will need to back up the system data to an FTP server. Normally, you will use an FTP server on the customer’s LAN for backups. To do this, you will need information on how to get to the backup location — login ID and password, and the IP address and directory path on the FTP server. Check with your project manager or the customer for this information. 104 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Before Going to the Customer Site CAUTION: Before going to the customer site, make sure that you can use a customer server for backups. Every S8300 media server and local survivable processor (LSP) requires a current and correct version of a license file in order to provide the expected call-processing service. The license file specifies the features and services that are available on the S8300 media server, such as the number of ports purchased. The license file contains a software version number, hardware serial number, expiration date, and feature mask. The license file is reinstalled to add or remove call-processing features. New license files may be required when upgrade software is installed. The Avaya authentication file contains the logins and passwords to access the S8300 media server. This file is updated regularly by Avaya services personnel, if the customer has a maintenance contract. All access to Communication Manager from any login is blocked unless a valid authentication file is present on the S8300 media server. A new license file and the Avaya authentication file may be installed independently of each other or any other server upgrades. NOTE: For an upgrade, you do not normally need to install a new authentication file (with a .pwd extension). However, if one is required, follow the same steps as with a license file. License File and Communication Manager Versions for a Local Survivable Processor The license file of the S8300 as an LSP must have a feature set that is equal to or greater than that of the media server that acts as primary controller (an S8300 or S8700). This is necessary so that if control passes to the LSP, it can allow the same level of call processing as that of the primary controller. Additionally, the LSP must have a version of Communication Manager that is identical to that of the primary controller. The license file requirements of the LSP should be identified in your planning documentation. Complete and Download the License File to Your Laptop 1 Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to create a directory on your laptop for storing license and authentication files (for example, C:\licenses). 2 3 Access the Internet from your laptop and go to rfa.avaya.com. 4 Check that the license and authentication files are complete. You might need to add the serial number of the customer’s G700. 5 If the files are not complete, complete them. Use the System ID or the SAP ID of the customer to locate the license and authentication files for the customer. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 105 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Before Going to the Customer Site 6 Use the download or E-mail capabilities of the RFA web site to download the license and authentication files to your laptop. Run the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the INADS IP Address, if Necessary This step is normally not necessary for an upgrade of an existing system. NOTE: ART is available only to Avaya associates. Business Partners call 800-295-0099. The ART tool is a software tool that generates an IP address for a customer’s INADS alarming modem. This IP address is required for configuring the S8300’s modem for alarming. NOTE: You must generate a license and authentication file before you use the ART tool. Also, the ART process is available only to Avaya personnel. You need an ART login ID and password, which you can set up at the ART web site. Non-Avaya personnel must contact their service support or customer care center for INADS addresses, if required. 1 2 Access the ART web site on your laptop at http://art.dr.avaya.com. Select Administer S8x00 Server products for installation script, log in, enter the customer information, select Installation Script, and click Start Installation script & IP Addr Admin. A script file is created and downloaded or emailed to you. 3 You can use the installation script to automatically set up an IP address and other alarming parameters. Obtain the Static Craft Password After installing new software and new Authentication file, you will need to use a static craft password to access the customer’s system. This static password will enable you to log in to the S8300 with a direct connection to the Services port without the ASG challenge/response. To obtain the static password, call the ASG Conversant number, 800-248-1234 or 720-444-5557 (or 877-295-0099 for Avaya Business Partners), and follow the prompts to get the password. In addition to your credentials, you will need to enter the customer’s Product ID or the FL or IL number. Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary Skip to the next section if a software update is not required for this installation or upgrade, or if the software for the required updates are on your software CD. If one or more updates are required for this installation or upgrade procedure, and the update file is not on your software CD, download the update file from the Avaya Support web site to your laptop: 1 2 106 On your laptop, create a directory to store the file (for example, c:\S8300download). Connect to the LAN using a browser on your laptop or the customer’s PC and access http://www.avaya.com/support on the Internet to copy the required Communication Manager update file to the laptop. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Before Going to the Customer Site 3 At the Avaya support site, select the following sequence of links: — Software & Firmware Downloads — G700 Media Gateway & S8300 Media Server — Software Downloads — Avaya Communication Manager Software Updates for MV x.x.x (where x.x.x is the release that is currently running on the S8300) 4 Locate the file name that matches the load listed in your planning documentation. The file name ends with .tar.gz (for example only, 03.0.526.5-5767.tar.gz). 5 6 Double-click the file name. The system displays a File Download window. Click on Save this file to disk. Save the file to an appropriate directory on your laptop. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 107 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 On-Site Preparation for the Installation On-Site Preparation for the Installation Perform these tasks before starting the software installation on the S8300. Install the New License File, If Necessary For new installations, you typically need to load a licences file. NOTE: If the S8300 is already set up for remote access, Avaya services personnel can copy new license and authentication files directly into the FTP directory on the server. Avaya personnel will notify you when the new files are in place as agreed (for example, by telephone or E-mail). After they are loaded into the FTP directory, install them using the License File and Authentication File screens from the S8300 main menu web-page. NOTE: Before an upload or download, be sure the S8300 FTP directory (/var/home/ftp/pub) contains no files with a .pwd or .lic extension. Only one of these files can exist in a directory. If one exists, move, rename, or delete it. If Necessary, Rename Old License and Authentication Files from S8300 FTP Directory Before an upload or download, be sure the S8300 FTP directory (/var/home/ftp/pub) contains no files with a .pwd or .lic extension. Only one of these files can exist in a directory. If one exists, move, rename, or delete it. 1 2 3 Log in to a telnet session on the S8300. At the command line, type cd /var/home/ftp/pub and press Enter. Type ls -l and press Enter. The system displays a list of files. 4 5 6 Check the list of files to see if any files with .lic or .pwd suffixes are in the directory. If any .lic or .pwd files exist, rename them. For example, type mv .lic .lic.old or mv .pwd .pwd.old and press Enter. Leave the telnet session open for a later task. Load License File (from Your Laptop) Use this procedure to transfer the license and password files from the CD or hard drive on your laptop to the S8300 hard drive. 1 2 108 Log on to the S8300 Web Interface In the main menu under Miscellaneous, click Download Files. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 On-Site Preparation for the Installation Download Files Screen 3 Select "Files to download from the machine I’m using to connect to the server" and click Browse for the first field. The S8300 displays the Choose File screen, which allows you to select files from your laptop. Choose File Screen 4 5 6 7 Locate the customer's license (.lic) file. When you have selected the .lic file, click Open in the dialog box. Click Browse for the second field. Locate the customer's .pwd file on your laptop. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 109 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 On-Site Preparation for the Installation 8 9 When you have selected the .pwd file, click Open in the dialog box. When you have finished entering the files to be uploaded, click Load File. When the files are successfully transferred, the system displays the status screen. If Necessary, Install License and Authentication Files 1 Under Security, select License File License File Screen 2 Select "Install the license file I previously downloaded" and click Submit. The system tells you the license is installed successfully. 3 110 Under Security, select Authentication File. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 On-Site Preparation for the Installation Install Authentication Screen 4 Select "Install the Authentication file I previously downloades" and click Install. The system tells you the authentication is installed successfully Run Save Translations (Only If New License and/or Authentication Files Installed) CAUTION: This procedure saves the official passwords for the customer’s system. If you fail to perform this step now, you may be irretrievably locked out of the system later in the installation when the system reboots. 1 2 In the telnet session, open a SAT session. and log in again as craft (or dadmin). At the SAT prompt, type save translation and press Enter. When the save is finished, the system displays the message, Command successfully completed. Determine Necessary Upgrades to the S8300 This procedure determines whether you need to upgrade Communication Manager on the S8300. If you do not need to upgrade Communication Manager, skip to Configure the S8300. Transfer Files from a CD or Laptop Normally, during an upgrade, you will have the CD-ROM that contains the latest software to install. The latest software for the S8300 has a file name that has a .tar extension and reflects the most recent load of software (For example only: S8300-02.0-00.0.218.6.tar; for systems with IA770, the filename would be similar to S8300msg-02.0-00.0.218.6.tar). The latest update (patch) software for Communication Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 111 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 On-Site Preparation for the Installation Manager has a .tar.gz extension and a file name that reflects the most recent load of software (for example, 03.0.110.4-4925.tar.gz). This .tar file will also contain the most recent firmware for the G700 Media Gateway, the various media modules, and the P330 stack processor. Tip: The Avaya Installation Wizard performs tasks automatically starting with this section. 1 2 Log in to the S8300 Web interface. Choose Download Files under Miscellaneous on the left pane of the main menu. Download Files Screen 112 3 Select "Files to download from the machine I’m using to connect to the server," then click Browse for the first file. The S8300 displays the Choose File window, which allows you to select files from your laptop. 4 Browse to the tarfiles directory on the CD (or to where the .tar files are stored on your laptop). Double-click the filename of the .tar file for the upgrade software (for example, S8300-02.000.0.219.1.tar or S8300msg-02.0-00.0.219.1.tar if using IA770). You need only one .tar file for the upgrade software. 5 Repeat the previous two steps for each additional file that you want to upload. (For example, the lastest software update file, if any). 6 Click Download. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 On-Site Preparation for the Installation When the files are successfully transferred, the system displays the Download Files Results screen with the following message: "The following files have been successfully uploaded to the server." CAUTION: At this point you are finished with the software CD-ROM. Remove the CD from your laptop now to avoid possible problems the next time your laptop is rebooted. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 113 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Although this is a new installation and a version of Communication Manager already exists on the S8300, there may be new software loads available that you need to install. If necessary, follow the steps in this section to install the most recent version of Communication Manager. Verify the Time, Date, and Time Zone 1 Under Server click Server Date/Time. Server Date/Time Window 2 Verify or set the media server’s time close enough to the NTS’s time, date, and time zone that synchronization can occur (within about 5 minutes). CAUTION: For a new installation, be sure to set the time and time zone before installing the S8300 software. Failure to do so may cause network problems. Install New Software 1 2 Launch the Maintenance Web Interface. Choose Install New Software under Server Upgrades from the left pane of the main menu. The S8300 displays the Install New Software screen. 114 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Choose Software Screen 3 On the Choose Software screen, select the software release number that you want to install (for example, the release listed in your planning documentation). Click Continue. The S8300 displays the Choose License Source screen. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 115 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Choose License Source Screen 4 If you have installed the license and authentication files, select the following: — I want to reuse the license files from the currently active partition on this server. — Do not update authentication information. For a normal installation, the license and authentication files should have been installed at this point. If these files have not been installed, select the following: — I will supply the license/authentication files myself when prompted later in this process. — Update authentication information as well as license information. 5 116 Click Continue. The system displays the Review Notices screen. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Review Notices Screen 6 For a new installation, or if you previously ran a backup, you do not need to run a backup at this time. If your planning documents instruct you to enable Tripwire, follow the instructions to reset the signature database. 7 Click Continue. The S8300 displays the Begin Installation screen, which summarizes the request you have made. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 117 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Begin Installation Screen 8 At the Begin Installation screen, click Continue. The S8300 displays the Install in Progress screen. Install in Progress Screen 118 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 9 The installation will take approximately 10 to 20 minutes. The Install in Progress screen refreshes every 10 seconds or on demand by clicking the Refresh button. When complete, the S8300 displays the Reboot Server screen. Reboot Server Window 10 Click Reboot. If IA770 is being used, it may take approximately 5 minutes to shut down IA770 before the reboot begins. The S8300 displays the Reboot in Progress screen. Reboot in Progress Screen NOTE: The reboot can take 20 minutes or longer. The system does not automatically tell you when the reboot is complete. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 119 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Wait 5 minutes (or about 20 minutes if running IA770) and then click Continue. If you click Continue before the reboot is finished, the screen will display "Expired Page." If you see the Expired Page message, refresh the browser. Or, if the Session Timeout screen appears, close the screen, logoff, and log on again. Click the Pickup button. You can also monitor the LEDs on the S8300 for progress on the installation. The Services port jack should have one yellow LED on the left that stays lit. The green LED on the right flashes until the reboot is complete. 11 When the reboot is complete, clicking Continue will display the Update Tripwire Database screen. 12 Unless instructed in your planning documents to update the tripwire database, select "Do not update the tripwire data base now" and click Continue. The system displays the Installation Complete screen. 120 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Installation Complete Screen 13 14 Click Close. You are returned to the main menu. Under Server, click Software Version to verify the new software version. Make the Upgrade Permanent CAUTION: You must make the upgrade of the software permanent so that the software is recognized and kept on the S8300. If you fail to make software permanent, then the next time you reboot, old software will become active. 1 From the S8300 main menu, under Server Upgrades click Make Upgrade Permanent . The S8300 displays the Make Server Upgrade Permanent window. 2 Click Submit. When the new S8300 upgrade software is permanent, the S8300 displays the message: The commit operation completed successfully. Install Communication Manager update (patch) files, if any NOTE: Skip this procedure if there are no Communication Manager update files to install. 1 From your laptop, start a telnet session to the S8300. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 121 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 If the AUDIX installation has not completed, the following warning screen will appear. CAUTION: If this warning screen appears, close the telnet session, wait about 5 minutes, and try again. 2 3 At the telnet prompt, type cd /var/home/ftp/pub and press Enter to access the FTP directory. At the prompt, type ls -ltr and press Enter to list files in the FTP directory. The S8300 displays a list of files in the FTP directory. 4 5 Verify that the directory contains the update .tar.gz file you have uploaded, if any. Type update_unpack .tar.gz, where is the release or issue number of the latest update file. (For example, 00.0.218.4-1003.tar.gz). Press Enter. 6 Type update_show again and press Enter to list Communication Manager files to verify the new software file was installed. 7 Type update_activate , where is the release or issue number of the latest update file. (For example, 00.0.218.4-1003. Do not use the .tar.gz extension at the end of the file name). Press Enter. The S8300 goes through a software reset system 4. The S8300 also may display the message /opt/ecs/sbin/drestart 1 4 command failed. Ignore this message. You must wait until the restart/reset has completed before entering additional commands. The S8300 displays a message that the update was applied. 8 Type update_show again and press Enter to list Communication Manager files to verify the new software file was applied. Install IA770 update (patch) files, if any If IA770 is being used, a post-upgrade update (patch) for IA770 may be required. See the IA770 documentation for procedures to install an update. The documentation can be found on the Avaya Support Web Site at http://support.avaya.com. Then click on Product Documentation and then Messaging and scroll down to the INTUITY document links. 122 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Configure the S8300 CAUTION: For a new installation, be sure you have set the time and timezone before proceeding. Failure to do so may cause network problems later. 1 On the S8300 Web page main menu, click on Configure Server under Server Configuration and Upgrade. The system displays the Configure Server screen. Configure Server Screen 2 Click Continue. The system displays the Back Up Data Notice screen. • For a new installation, a backup at this point is unnecessary. You will perform a backup after the installation. • For an upgrade, perform the backup, as described in Back up the System on page 168. 3 Click Continue. The Select Method screen appears. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 123 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Select Method Screen 4 Click Configure all services using the wizard. With this option, the wizard will guide you through the screens to configure all of the IP services. NOTE: This option is for the built-in configuration wizard, not the Avaya Installation Wizard (IW). If you are upgrading an existing system, you may also click Configure individual services. This method is useful after an initial configuration has been completed and one or more services need to be changed. 5 Click Continue. The Set Server Identities screen appears. 124 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Set Server Identities Screen 6 Enter the host name for this server in the Host Name field (see your planning forms). The host name uniquely identifies this server. CAUTION: If the S8300 on the G700 is hosting an IA 770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging Application with Digital Networking, the name must be 10 characters or less. The screen also lists the current physical cabling to the server. For example, the Services laptop is connected to Ethernet interface 0. Ethernet functions are fixed on the S8300 media server and cannot be changed. 7 Click Continue. The Configure Ethernet Interfaces screen appears. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 125 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Configure Ethernet Interfaces Screen 8 Use your planning forms to complete the fields for the: — IP Address assigned to the S8300 Media Server. Check your planning forms. — Gateway with the IP address of the default gateway of the subnet. — Subnet Mask with the value of the subnet mask of the hosting subnet. — Speed which should be set to Auto Sense. CAUTION: Do not guess on the addresses on this screen. If you enter the wrong addresses, service will be disrupted across the customer’s network and may be difficult to correct. 9 Click Continue. The Configure Local Survivable Processor screen appears. 126 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Configure Local Survivable Processor Screen 10 Select one of the following options: — This is NOT a local survivable processor. — This is a local survivable processor (LSP) with an S8700 media server as the primary controller. — This is a local survivable processor (LSP) with an S8500 media server as the primary controller. — This is a local survivable processor with a S8300 media server as the primary controller. 11 If you clicked the LSP option with an S8500 or S8700, complete the additional fields as follows: CLAN IP address of the primary controller — Enter the IP address of any CLAN board in the S8700 media server configuration. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 127 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 IP address of server 1 (required) — Enter the IP address of the primary S8700 server. IP address of server 2 (optional) — Enter the IP address of the duplicated primary S8700 server. If server 2 is present, this specific IP address must also be entered. IP address of secondary server 1 (optional) — Enter the IP address of the secondary S8700 server. IP address of secondary server 2 (optional) — Enter the IP address of the duplicated secondary S8700 server NOTE: The CLAN boards must be TN799DP running version 5 or greater firmware. Be sure to check the firmware version for these boards on the S8500 or S8700. For information on how to upgrade the firmware on the S8500 or S8700, please see the section "Upgrade Firmware in Selected Port Cabinet Packs" in Upgrading the Avaya Media Server Configuration in the S8700 documentation portion of this documentation CD (‘‘Avaya S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Server Library CD, 555-233-825’’). 12 13 If you clicked the LSP option with an S8300, simply enter the IP address of the S8300 server. Click Continue. The Ethernet Adjuncts screen appears. Ethernet Adjuncts Screen 14 In the Number of UPS Units field, select the number of Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) units connected to the S8300 Media Server. This number is usually 0 or 1. 15 If you enter 1 in the Number of UPS Units field, enter its IP address in the UPS 1 IP address field. The system will use this address to trap power loss signals from the UPS. 16 (Optional) If you enter 1 in the Number of UPS Units field, enter the SNMP community strings for the UPS in the SNMP Get and Set fields. 17 Click Continue. The External DNS Server Configuration screen appears. 128 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Most corporate networks have one or more domain name service (DNS) servers that associate an IP address with a device’s name. When the DNS is administered with the S8300 Media Server name, you will be able to access the S8300 server by name as well as IP address over the corporate network. CAUTION: If you configure an external DNS server, the DNS will be an extra device that, if not working properly, can cause delays in S8300 access. External DNS Server Configuration Screen 18 Enter the appropriate IP addresses from your planning documentation. Then, click Continue. In the Name Servers fields, enter the IP addresses for up to 3 DNS servers on the corporate network. The S8300 Media Server checks the DNS servers in the order in which their addresses are entered for name-to-IP address resolution. In the DNS Domain field, enter the name for the part of the network on which the DNS server(s) reside (for example, mycompany.com). Internet domains are sets of addresses generally organized by location or purpose. In the Search Domain fields, 1 to 5, enter the names of the domains that will be searched, in order, if a user enters an unqualified or incomplete name (such as a host name only without its domain). NOTE: For Search Domain 1, enter the same domain name you entered in the DNS Domain field above. 19 Click Continue. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 129 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 The Static Network Routes screen appears. Static Network Routes are used only if the customer has defined additional routes for IP packets other than through the default gateway. Set Network Routes Screen 20 21 Leave these entries blank, unless the planning documentation supplies routing information. Click Continue. The system displays the Network Time Server screen. The Network Time Server screen allows you to set up the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Service. 130 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Network Time Server Screen You will be able to make the following choices, according to the planning documentation: — Choose Disable NTP if the user does not want the Network Time Protocol to run on the S8300 Media Server. Select this option to disable Network Time Protocol (NTP) and use the media server's own clock as a time source. You typically choose this option if this is the only media server in the configuration and it will not be synchronized with an external time source. — Choose Enable NTP if the S8300 Media Server will be the primary NTP server. Optionally, you can provide the address of the survivable S8300 Media Server in the local survivable configuration. Select this option to enable NTP and use the media server's own clock as a time source. You typically choose this option if there is more than one media server in the configuration (for example, this or another media server may be acting as an LSP standby unit), and an external time source is not available to provide synchronization between the units. Select this option to enable NTP and use its own clock as a time source. You need to set up the time clock with Set Server Time/Timezone option. You need to set the server clock using the Set Server Time / Timezone screen. You can do this now, then return to the Configure Server window. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 131 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 — Choose Use these Network Time Servers to enter up to three time servers. Select this option to enable NTP and be synchronized with an external time source on the corporate network. 22 If you did not select Use these Network Time Servers in the previous step, click Continue and go to the next step If you selected Use these Network Time Servers in the previous step, complete the following fields. Specify up to three network time servers by IP address or DNS name in the order in which you want the S8300 Media Server to check them. You should always specify at least two. Primary — Enter an IP address or DNS name. If a trusted key is required, enter a valid key number in the Trusted Key field. Secondary — Enter an IP address or DNS name. If a trusted key is required, enter a valid key number in the Trusted Key field. Tertiary — Enter an IP address or DNS name. If a trusted key is required, enter a valid key number in the Trusted Key field. Multicast Client Support — Select Yes if the NTS routinely broadcasts its timing messages to multiple clients. Select No if the S8300 Media Server is to poll (directly request the time from) the NTS. Additional trusted keys (optional) — If you want to encrypt the messages between an NTS and the S8300 Media Server, list the valid key numbers, up to 3, provided by your LAN administrator on the pre installation worksheet. Trusted keys function like a checksum to make sure the time packets are valid. Use a blank space as a delimiter if there is more than one key (for example, 2 3 6 to specify valid keys 2, 3, and 6). These numbers are associated with encryption codes in a "keys" file. Request key — Enter a key to send a remote query request. Only 1 key is allowed in this field. Control key — Enter a key to query and request changes to an NTS. Only 1 key is allowed in this field. 23 If you have a file named keys.install to allow the media server to communicate with the NTS, select Install keys from var/home/ftp/keys.install. If you do not have a keys.install file, select Do not install a new keys file. If you have a keys.install file, upload or create it now, if possible. See Provide the keys.install File (If Necessary) on page 135. If you upload the keys file later, you have to run the Configure Server wizard again to have the system recognize it. Click Continue. 24 132 At the next screen, Set Modem Interface, you can set up the Modem Interface IP Address for Avaya-provided service. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Set Modem Interface Screen The Modem IP Address for the Avaya INADS alarming is assigned by the ART tool. You should have obtained this address when you performed Run the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the INADS IP Address, if Necessary on page 106. Click Continue. The next Warning screen indicates that the data entry process has concluded and that the system is ready to be configured. Warning Screen This is the final step in configuring the system. When you click Continue, all the configuration information will be written to disk and implemented. This step normally completes in about 5 minutes. This is your last chance to cancel or correct the configuration. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 133 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 25 To check, or possibly change, something you entered on a previous screen, use your browser’s Back button to page back through the Configure Server screens. 26 27 Check or change the items in question. Click the Continue button to move forward again, whether you change anything or not. If you don’t do this, information in the wizard may not be processed correctly. NOTE: For any configuration, it is always safe to Cancel the configuration, and run the Configure Server wizard again later from the beginning. You might use this option if you are checking or modifying settings on a server that has already been configured, and there is not a large amount of new information to enter. 28 On the Update System screen, if you are satisfied that everything is set correctly, click Continue. You can watch the progress of the configuration at the Updating System Files screen. If the configuration status displays stops updating at some point and the screen appears to freeze, you may have lost contact with the server. In this case, the configuration process will continue and you can log back on and pick up where left off. Updating System Files Screen When the process is complete, you will receive a notification. Click Close Window and continue the configuration of the G700 Media Gateway on the command line interface. 134 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 Provide the keys.install File (If Necessary) Use this procedure only if you selected one of the customer-provided keys options in the previous procedure. If encryption between the NTS and S8300 Media Server is to be used for additional security, you must provide a keys.install file that specifies for each key: • The key number • The encryption type • The key code If the keys file is short, the network administrator can create one now during configuration if needed: Create the key file 1 On a directly connected laptop or other computer, create a flat-text file named keys.install with the correct keys information using any ASCII application. 2 3 Next, upload the keys.install file using the Upload Files to Server screen as described earlier. When finished, click on the Configure Server wizard window to resume server configuration. The keys file can be loaded in one of the following ways. Upload the keys file If a keys.install file was previously created on or downloaded to the services laptop or another computer on the network, it can be installed now as follows. 1 2 3 In the main menu under Miscellaneous, click the Upload Files to Server link. Locate the keys.install file on your computer or network, then click Load File. The file is uploaded to the media server’s FTP directory. When finished, click on the Configure Server wizard window to resume server configuration. Download or copy the keys file Longer files may be transferred from the network time server to the S8300 Media Server as follows: 1 Using either the Download Files to Server screen or the Transfer files using an FTP procedure to access the keys file listed on your pre installation worksheet. In both cases, the file is transferred to the media server’s FTP directory. 2 3 When finished, click on the Configure Server wizard window to resume server configuration. 4 If a keys file is not used, or if the correct keys.install file is already installed, select the option to not install a new keys file. After the keys.install file is uploaded, select the location where it resides, usually in the /var/home/ftp subdirectory. (Services personnel may direct you to use the /tmp directory.) Set the media server’s time now 1 In the main menu under Server, click Set Server Time / Timezone. The S8300 displays the Set Server Time/Timezone window. 2 Set the media server’s time close enough to the NTS’s time, date, and time zone that synchronization can occur (within about 5 minutes). Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 135 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Software on the S8300 3 When finished, click on the Configure Server wizard window to continue. After NTP is enabled, time changes greater than 15 minutes will disrupt the synchronization with the NTS and NTP will shut down. You need to set the server’s clock now so that synchronization can take place. 4 136 When finished, click Continue. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Configure the G700 Media Gateway Configure the G700 Media Gateway This section describes the procedures for assigning IP addresses to the G700 components and for assigning IP routing. Assign the IP Addresses of the G700 Media Gateway Components NOTE: The Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) performs this task automatically. This section describes how to assign the IP addresses and IP routes to the G700 Media Gateway and its components. The IP addresses should be available to you on the IP Addressing Planning Form. The command arguments you will be supplying include: vlan –Virtual Local Area Network: a defined network segment that allows users on that segment to have priority services in sharing information with each other. If the network is not using VLANs, the VLAN should be 1. Otherwise, use the VLAN numbers indicated in your planning forms. The G700 Media Gateway should be assigned the same VLAN as the VLAN to which the Ethernet ports are connected. The P330 stack processor might or might not be assigned to the customer’s network management VLAN. IP address –the unique identifier assigned to an entity on the customer LAN netmask –the subnet mask for the customer’s LAN segment destination –distant networks that the IP route command needs to send packets to. Usually generalized to 0.0.0.0 for networks other than the local segment. default gateway –the gateway the ip route command specifies to get to the distant networks Access the P330 stack processor 1 Set up a direct connection to the G700 Console (serial) port and access the P330 stack processor using Hyperterm (or similar terminal emulation application). 2 Login as root. Assign the IP address to the P330 stack processor CAUTION: The nvram init command initializes the switch parameters to the factory defaults. This command is normally used only for new installations. 1 2 3 Initialize NVRAM: type nvram init Change mode to configure: type configure At the P330-1(super)# prompt, type configure. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 137 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Configure the G700 Media Gateway 4 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type set interface inband to assign an IP address to the P330 stack processor. is the vlan number, usually 1, to be established on the S8300 for the G700 Media Gateways. The is the assigned addresses for the P330 stack processor. 5 6 Type reset and press Enter to reset the stack. Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. All LEDs will flash. As the unit powers up, self-tests will be run. When the G700 mpg or P330 stack processor has reset, login again to continue. 7 Login at the Welcome to P330 menu. The prompt P330-1(super)# appears. 8 Type configure to obtain the P330-1(configure)# prompt. Establish the IP Routing for the Stack 1 Type show interface inband to verify that the Avaya P330 stack server (Layer 2 Switching Processor) has the correct address. 2 Type set ip route 0.0.0.0 to set the destination and gateway IP addresses. You will find these addresses in the planning documentation. is the IP address of the customer’s network gateway. 3 4 Press Enter to save the destination and gateway IP addresses. Type show ip route. The route net and route host tables appear. Verify that the information is correct. Check the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway processor After you have configured the P330 stack processor, you will assign an IP address to the G700 Media Gateway Processor (MGP). Your first step is to check the serial number of the MGP. 1 2 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type show system to list various attributes of the G700. The system displays a list of attributes, as shown in the following example: 138 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Configure the G700 Media Gateway Show System List for G700 Media Gateway MG-001-1(super)# show sys Uptime(d,h:m:s): 1, 08:17:12 System Name : System Location: System Contact : MAC Address : Serial No : Model No : HW Vintage : HW Suffix : FW Vintage : -- Empty --- Empty --- Empty -00-04-0D-02-04-EF 02DR07428721 G700 00 A 230 Media Gateway Power Supplies VOLTAGE(V) ACTUAL(V) STATUS ---------- ---------- ---------DSP Complex 3.4 3.359 OK MGP 5.1 5.000 OK Fans 1.2 0.000 OK Media Modules -48.0 -47.259 OK VoIP DSP 1.6 1.570 OK VoIP 8260 2.5 2.470 OK Aux -48.0 0.000 OK --type q to quit or space key to continue-MG-???-1(super)# 3 Write the serial number on your planning document. Make sure it matches the serial number sticker on the back of the G700 Media Gateway chassis. If there is a difference, the serial number in the displayed list is correct.You will need this later. Assign the IP Address to the G700 Media Gateway Processor 1 2 At the MG-???-n(super)# prompt, type configure to change to configuration mode. Type nvram init to recondition the processor. This procedure re initializes the G700 software back to factory defaults so new IP addresses can be stored correctly in the software. It also clears all configuration and administration on the G700 Media Gateway. The system prompts you to verify that you want to erase the configuration. 3 Answer the prompt by typing y(es). The G700 Media Gateway re initializes. 4 5 6 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure to change to configuration mode. Type set interface mgp to assign an IP address to the G700 Media Gateway. is the vlan to be established on the customer’s local network. This is usually 1. The is the assigned addresses for the G700 Media Gateway. CAUTION: If this G700 contains an S8300 configured as an LSP, use the VLAN administered on the primary controller. 7 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type reset mgp. A system prompt asks to confirm the reset. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 139 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Configure the G700 Media Gateway 8 Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. The prompt will change to P330-1(configure)# The G700 Media Gateway processor will reset. The LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway and the Media Modules will flash. These elements will each conduct a series of self-tests. When the LEDs on the Media Modules are extinguished and the active status LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway are on, the reset is complete. 9 10 11 When the mgp reset is complete, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure to reach the configuration level of the command line interface. Type show interface mgp to verify that the G700 Media Gateway has the correct IP address. Assign an IP Route for the Default Gateway The default gateway is a router or switch that routes packets to destinations outside of the local subnetwork. 1 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type set ip route . Both and are 0.0.0.0 for the default gateway. is the IP address of the router or switch that is designated to handle packets addressed to destinations outside of the local subnetwork. 2 3 Type show ip route mgp to view the results. Repeat <~Link>step 1 for additional ip routes, if needed. Usually, only a default route is needed. Refer to your planning document. Assign IP Addresses to the VoIP Resources From the G700 Media Gateway Processor command line interface, you will assign IP addresses to the VoIP resource resident on the G700 Media Gateway and to any installed MM760 VoIP Media Modules. 1 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type set interface voip For example: set interface voip v0 132.236.73.3 is the slot number of the VoIP media module. v0 designates the VoIP resource resident on the G700 Media Gateway motherboard. The MM760 VoIP Media Modules are designated according the slot (for example, v1, v2, v3, v4) in which the Media Module has been installed. is the IP address of the VoIP resource. 2 Type show interface to display a table of all configured interfaces, including all VoIP Media Modules. 3 Type show voip v0 to display the VoIP resource on the motherboard. NOTE: It is not necessary to configure the VLAN, netmask, or IP routes for VoIP engines. The media gateway parameters are applied automatically. Check for IP Connections After you have assigned IP addresses to the P330 Stack Processor (Layer 2 Switching Processor), the G700 Media Gateway MGP, Media Modules, and the VoIP resources, do the following procedure to validate the IP connections. 140 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Configure the G700 Media Gateway Run the ping command 1 At the MG-???-n(config)# prompt, type ping mgp where is the address of an S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server, the VoIP engine, or any other functioning endpoint accessible on the customer’s LAN. It is recommended to ping endpoints on both the same subnet and a different subnet. Ping results appear on the screen, similar to the following example. Ping MGP Results MG-???-1(configure)# ping mgp 135.122.49.55 PING 135.122.49.55: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=3. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=4. time=0. ms ----135.122.49.55 PING Statistics---5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0 2 3 Check that the same number of packets transmitted were also received. Type ping voip v0 , where is the address of the G700, or any other functioning endpoint on the customer’s LAN. Ping results appear on the screen, similar to the following example. Ping VoIP Results MG-???-1(configure)# ping voip v0 135.122.49.55 ----135.122.49.55 PING Statistics---5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0 packet loss round-trip(ms) min/avg/max = 0/1/0 Set up the Controller List for the G700 Media Gateway NOTE: The Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) performs this task automatically. To complete the configuration of the G700 Media Gateway, you need to administer a list of primary and alternate controllers. This list begins with the IP address of the primary controller. In the event that the G700 Media Gateway loses contact with its primary controller, it will seek to re-register with the primary controller first, then with the other controllers on this list. The other controllers are S8500 or S8700 Media Servers that can act as the primary controller, or S8300 Media Servers configured as Local Survivable Processors (LSPs). Up to four IP addresses separated by commas can be entered to form the controller list. 1 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type the following commands to designate the primary, secondary, and LSP controllers for this G700: Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 141 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Configure the G700 Media Gateway clear mgc list set mgc list [, [, [, ]]] where, the first is the IP address of the primary controller for this G700. If the primary controller is an S8700, this is the IP address of a C-LAN board that is connected to a pair of duplicated S8700s. If the Primary controller is an S8300, this is the IP address of the S8300. The next three parameters are optional IP addresses of up to three alternate controllers. Each of the three optional controllers can be an S8700 duplicated pair or an S8300 configured as an LSP, depending on the G700’s primary controller. CAUTION: If you need to change the mgc list, you must run clear mgc list before running set mgc list again. The following table describes the possible optional controllers for an S8300 and S8700 primary controller: Primary Server Controller IP Addresses First: IP address of the S8300 primary controller. S8300 Next three: one, two, or three IP addresses of S8300s configured as LSPs. First: IP address of the C-LAN for the S8500 or S8700 primary S8500 or S8700 controller. Next three: one, two, or three IP addresses of alternate C-LANs and/or LSPs. For an S8500 or S8700 primary controller, the last three IP addresses in the list can be either the addresses of C-LANS (which are connected to the same S8500 or pair of S8700s that act as primary controllers) or addresses of LSPs. If you enter a combination of both, you must list CLANs first and the LSPs last, after the C-LANs. 2 Type reset mgp at the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt to reset the G700 Media Gateway processor. A system prompt asks to confirm the reset. 3 Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. The G700 Media Gateway processor will reset. The LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway and the Media Modules will flash. These elements will each conduct a series of self-tests. When the LEDs on the Media Modules are extinguished and the active status LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway are on, the reset is complete. The system ultimately returns you to the P330-1 (configure) prompt. At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-001-1(super)# prompt, type configure to change to the configuration mode. NOTE: Because the G700 media gateway has registered with its primary controller, the prompt name has changed; for example, to MG-001-1. 142 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Configure the G700 Media Gateway Type show mgc to display the list of available servers and their IP addresses. For example: Show Call Controller Status Screen MG-001-1(configure)# show mgc CALL CONTROLLER STATUS -----------------------------------------Registered : YES Active Controller : 135.9.71.95 H248 Link Status : UP H248 Link Error Code: 0x0 MGC List Management : Static CONFIGURED MGC HOST -------------------135.9.71.95 - Not Available -- Not Available -- Not Available -- DHCP SPECIFIED MGC HOST ------------------------ Not Available --- Not Available --- Not Available --- Not Available -- The Gateway will have registered with the primary controller, if present. If the primary controller is running and has been administered properly, the Registered field says YES and the H248 Link Status says UP. If the controller is not running, the Registered field says NO and the H248 Link Status says DOWN. Set the LSP Transition Points You must set the time that the G700 searches, in the event of a network problem, for primary controllers (for example, additional CLAN connections) with which to register. After this search time has elapsed, the G700 will search for an LSP with which to register. You must also set the total time the G700 searches for either a primary controller and an LSP, after which the G700 resets. And finally, you must define how many primary controllers, from 1 to 4, are in the controller list you just defined. 1 At the MG-001-1(configure)# prompt, type set mgp reset-times primary-search where is the time in minutes that the G700 searches for a primary controller before looking for an LSP. The range is from 1 to 60. 2 At the MG-001-1(configure)# prompt, type set mgp reset-times total-search where is the time in minutes that the G700 searches for both primary controllers or LSPs. The range is from 1 to 60. 3 At the MG-001-1(configure)# prompt, type set mgp reset-times transition-point <#_of_primary> where <#_of_primary> is the number of primary controllers in the controller list. If the primary controller is an S8500 or S8700, the range is from 1 to 4. If the primary controller is an S8300, <#_of_primary> must be 1. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 143 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Configure the G700 Media Gateway Configure an X330 Expansion Module (If Necessary) NOTE: You cannot use the IW to perform this task. 1 See the Avaya X330W-2DS1 Access Router Module Quick Start Guide. This document is available at the Avaya Support website: Support > Technical Database > LAN, Backbone, and Edge Access Switches > P330 Stackable Switching System > All Documents 2 144 Select the Quick Start Guide for X330WAN 2DS1 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 Install New Firmware on the G700 This section describes the procedures to install firmware on the G700 Media Gateway processors and media modules. Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory Before proceeding with the G700 firmware installation, you should check the tftpboot directory on the TFTP server to make sure the firmware versions match those listed in the planning documentation. Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 Conduct the following procedure to compare software versions running on the G700 processors and media modules with the versions in you planning documents. If the versions do not match, new firmware for those components is necessary. Determine if new firmware for the P330 stack processor is necessary. 1 At either the P330-1(super)# or P330-1(configure)# prompt, type dir. The system displays the list of software. Directory List for P300 Processor M# -1 1 1 1 file ---module-config stack-config EW_Archive Booter_Image ver num ------N/A N/A 3.8.6 3.2.5 file type ---------Running Conf Running Conf SW Web Image SW BootImage file location ------------Ram Ram NV-Ram NV-Ram file description ---------------Module Configuration Stack Configuration WEB Download Booter Image 2 Check the version number (ver num) of the EW_Archive file to see if it matches the Release Letter. If not, you must upgrade the P330 stack processor. 3 Type show image version The system displays the list of software. Show Image Version List for P330 Processor Mod -----3 3 Module-Type ----------Avaya G700 Media Gateway Avaya G700 Media Gateway Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Bank Version ---- ------A 0.0.0 B 3.9.0 145 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 4 Check the version number of the stack software image file in Band B to see if it matches the your planning document. If not, you must upgrade the P330 stack processor. Determine if new firmware is required for the MGP, VoIP Module, and installed media modules. 1 2 Type session mgp At the MG-001-1(super)# prompt, type show mg list_config The system displays the list of software. Show MG List_Config eyp SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------210(B) 00 52 12 54 VOIP FW ------2 N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 Refer to the list to check the FW vintage number of the G700. In the TYPE column, find G700, then check the matching field in the FW VINTAGE column to see if it matches the vintage number in your planning forms. If not, you must install new firmware on the G700 Media Gateway. Also check if the release number in the FW VINTAGE column contains (A) or (B) to designate the software bank. If the list shows B, you will upgrade A. If the list shows A, you will upgrade B. 4 Refer to the VOIP FW column and row for slot V0 (same row occupied by the G700 information) to see if the number matches the VoIP firmware identified in your planning forms. If not, you must also upgrade the G700 Media Gateway motherboard VoIP module. NOTE: The VoIP processor on the motherboard is upgraded using the same firmware image file as the VoIP media modules; for example, the file mm760v8.fdl is vintage #8. 5 Check the FW VINTAGE column for vintages of each of the installed Media Modules: MM710, MM711, MM712, MM720, and/or MM760 to see if they match the FW vintages in the planning forms. If not, you must upgrade them, as well. Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor Install P330 stack processor firmware 1 From your S8300 telnet session, telnet back to the P330 stack processor: Type telnet , where is the IP address of the P330 stack master processor on the customer’s LAN. 146 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 1 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type copy tftp SW_image EW_archive where is the full-path name for the image file with format and vintage number similar to viisa3_8_2.exe, is the full-path name for the embedded web application file with format similar to p330Tweb.3.8.6.exe, is the IP address of the TFTP server, and is the number, 1 through 10, of the media gateway in the stack. If there is only one G700 Media Gateway, the number is 1. 2 To verify that the download was successful when the prompt returns: — type show image version and check the version number in the Version column for Bank B. — type dir and check the version number in the ver num column for the EW_Archive file. 3 Type reset Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor Install MGP firmware 1 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp to reach the G700 Media Gateway processor. 2 Type configure at the MG-???-1(super)# prompt to enter configuration mode, which will change the prompt to MG-???-1(configure)#. 3 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type show mgp bootimage to determine which disk partition (bank) is in the Active Now column. You will update the bank that is not listed as Active Now. The system displays the following screen: Example: Show mgp bootimage FLASH MEMORY Bank A Bank B IMAGE VERSION 109 210 ACTIVE NOW Bank B ACTIVE AFTER REBOOT Bank B 4 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type copy tftp mgp-image to transfer the mgp image from the tftp server to the G700, where is the bank that is not Active Now (Bank A in the example). Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 147 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 is the full path name of the mgp firmware image file, which begins with mgp and will be similar to the name mgp_8_0.bin. is the IP address of the S8300. See the following example: copy tftp mgp-image a mgp_8_0.bin 195.123.49.54. The screen will show the progress. 5 Type set mgp bootimage where is the same letter you entered in the previous step. 6 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type reset mgp. A system prompt asks to confirm the reset. 7 Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. The G700 Media Gateway processor will reset. The LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway and the Media Modules will flash. These elements will each conduct a series of self-tests. When the LEDs on the Media Modules are extinguished and the active status LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway are on, the reset is complete. 8 9 10 When the P330-1(super)# prompt appears, type session mgp. At the MGP-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure. Verify that the download was successful when the prompt returns. Type show mg list_config. The system displays the list of software. Example: Show mg list_config SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------230(A) 00 58 57 58 VOIP FW ------67 N/A N/A N/A N/A Install New Firmware on the Media Modules For upgrades of active media modules, you need to take the media modules out of service before initiating the upgrade process. To do this, go to a SAT session on the primary controller and issue a busyout command. NOTE: Skip this busyout procedure if the media modules are not in service; for example during an initial installation. Busyout board (for active media modules) 1 Go to a SAT session on the primary controller and enter the command, busyout board vx where x is the slot number of the media module to be upgraded. 148 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 2 3 Verify the response, Command Successfully Completed. Repeat for each media module to be upgraded. Install media module firmware 1 Be sure that you have checked for the current vintage of the VoIP Module for the v0 slot (on the G700 motherboard) (see Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700). This VoIP module does not occupy a physical position like other Media Modules. 2 3 4 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-001-1(super)# prompt, type configure to change to the configuration mode. Type copy tftp mm-image v where is the slot of the specific media module as identified when you performed Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700, the full-path name of the media module firmware file in a format such mm712v58.fdl, and is the ip address of the S8300. Two or three minutes will be required for most upgrades. The VoIP Media Module upgrade takes approximately 5 minutes. Screen messages indicate when the transfer is complete. 5 After you have upgraded all the media modules, verify that the new versions are present. At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type show mg list_config The list of software appears Show MG List_Config SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------230(A) 00 58 57 58 VOIP FW ------67 N/A N/A N/A N/A 6 In the TYPE column, find the particular media module (v1 through v4), then check the matching field in the FW VINTAGE column to see if it matches the planning documentation. Note that slot V1 can contain either a media module or the S8300, which will show as Type "ICC". 7 Check the VOIP FW column and row for slot v0 to see if the number matches the VoIP firmware identified in the planning documentation. 8 9 Type reset where is the number of the G700 in the stack. When the reset is finished, type show mm to verify the upgrade. Release board (if media module was busied out) 1 When the upgrade procedure is complete, go to the SAT session and release the board: type release board vx where x is the slot number of the upgraded media module. 2 Verify the response, Command Successfully Completed. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 149 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 NOTE: If you see the response, Board Not Inserted, this means that the media module is still rebooting. Wait one minute and repeat the release board command. 3 150 Repeat the release board command for each media module that was busied out. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager Administer Communication Manager Perform one of the following two administration procedures in this section: • The Primary Controller is an S8300, or • The Primary Controller is an S8500 or S8700 (the S8300 Is an LSP) The Primary Controller is an S8300 CAUTION: This administration applies only to an S8300 that serves as the primary controller for the target G700. The S8300 primary controller can be in the target G700 or in another, possibly remote, G700. If the S8300 is an LSP, do not administer Communication Manager on it. Translations are automatically copied to the LSP from the S8300 primary controller. If the primary controller is an S8500 or S8700, skip this section and go to The Primary Controller is an S8500 or S8700 (the S8300 Is an LSP) on page 155 This document covers only the administration of Communication Manager required for the G700 Media Gateway to communicate with the primary controller over a customer’s network. For the majority of administration required, see ‘‘Administrator’s Guide to Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-506,’’ or ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ In this section, you will use the SAT interface to: • Assign Node Names for LSPs • Define the IP Network Region • Add a Media Gateway. CAUTION: Before continuing, be sure you have saved translations in Communication Manager. Reset the System 1 2 Telnet to the S8300, log in, and open a SAT session (type sat or dsat). At the SAT prompt, type reset system 4 The system reboots. 3 After the reboot is complete, telnet to the S8300, login, and open a SAT session. Assign Node Names and IP Addresses for the LSPs If the S8300 network configuration includes LSPs, they must be specifiied on the Node Names form. Assign node names 1 At the S8300 SAT prompt, type change node-names ip to open the Node Names screen. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 151 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager Example Node Names Screen change node-names ip Page 1 of 1 IP NODE NAMES Name default_________ node-10-lsp node-11-lsp __________ __________ __________ 2 3 IP Address 0__.0__.0__.0__ 192.168.1 _.50_ 192.168.1 _.51_ ___.___.___. _ ___.___.___. _ ___.___.___. _ Name _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ IP Address ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ Enter the name and IP addresses for the LSPs. Press F 3 (E NT ER ) when complete. Administer Network Regions Before assigning an IP network region to a G700, you must define network region on the IP Network Region form. After a network region is defined, you can assign it to the various network elements (servers, gateways, IP phones). The information you need to do this should be provided in your planning documentation. Use the system defaults if the planning documentation does not specify otherwise. For a G700 with an S8300 as primary controller, there will usually be one network region, defined as 1. The procedure below uses 1 for the network region number as an example but the procedure applies for any network region number from 1 to 250. Define IP network region 1 CAUTION: Defining IP network regions can be quite complex. For detailed information on the use and administration of IP network regions, see ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ 1 At the SAT prompt, type change ip-network-region 1. The S8300 displays the IP Network Region screen. 152 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager IP Network Region Screen change ip-network-region 1 Page 1 of 19 IP NETWORK REGION Region: 1 Location: Name: Home Domain: AUDIO PARAMETERS Codec Set: 1 UDP Port Min: 2048 UDP Port Max: 3028 DiffServ/TOS PARAMETERS Call Control PHB Value: 34 Audio PHB Value: 46 802.1P/Q PARAMETERS Call Control 802.1p Priority: 7 Audio 802.1p Priority: 6 H.323 IP ENDPOINTS H.323 Link Bounce Recovery? y Idle Traffic Interval (sec): 20 Keep-Alive Interval (sec): 5 Keep-Alive Count: 5 2 Intra-region IP-IP Direct Audio: yes Inter-region IP-IP Direct Audio: yes IP Audio Hairpinning? y RTCP Reporting Enabled? n RTCP MONITOR SERVER PARAMETERS Use Default Server Parameters? y AUDIO RESOURCE RESERVATION PARAMETERS RSVP Enabled? n If necessary, complete the fields as described in ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ NOTE: It is strongly recommended to use the defaults in the screen. However, for the RTCP Enabled and RSVP Enabled fields, the entry should be n (no). 3 Press F 3 (E NT ER ) to submit the screen. Associate LSPs with Network Regions If the primary controller has LSPs, you can associate each LSP with one or more network regions. In the event of a network failure, IP telephones assigned to a network region will register with an LSP associated with that region. This procedure associates up to six LSPs with a network region. Associate LSPs with a network region 1 On the IP Network Region screen, go to page 2. IP Network Region Screen, page 3 change ip-network-region 1 Page 2 of 19 IP NETWORK REGION LSP 1 2 3 4 5 6 NAMES IN PRIORITY ORDER node-10-LSP_____ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 153 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager 2 Enter the names of up to six LSPs to be associated with region 1. The LSP names must be the same as administered on the Node Names form. 3 4 Submit the form. Repeat for each network region with which you want to associate LSPs. Administer IP Interfaces This procedure assigns network region 1, as an example, to the S8300 Media Server. Assign the network region to the S8300 1 At the SAT prompt, type change ip-interfaces procr. The S8300 displays the IP Interfaces screen for the media server. IP Interfaces Screen change ip-interfaces procr Page 1 of 1 IP INTERFACES Type: PROCR Node Name: procr IP Address: 135.9.41.146 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Enable Ehternet Port? Nework Region: 1 2 The field Eth Port should indicate Y (yes). The Node Name should be the IP address of the S8300 Media Server. Administer the LSP Form If the primary controller has LSPs, you must enter the LSP node names on the LSP form to enable the LSPs to get translations updates from the primary controller. Once the LSPs are successfully entered on the LSP form, their status can be viewed with the display lsp command. NOTE: The LSP node names must be administered on the node-names-ip form before they can be entered on the LSP form. Add LSP names to the LSP form 1 154 At the S8300 SAT prompt, type change lsp to open the LSP form. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager LSP Screen change lsp Number NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 node-10-LSP_ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ Page LOCAL SURVIVABLE PROCESSOR IP Address Service State? 192.168.1.50 in-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service 1 of 16 Translations Updated 14:21 5/4/2003 Enter the node name for each LSP supported by the primary controller and submit the form. The Primary Controller is an S8500 or S8700 (the S8300 Is an LSP) CAUTION: This administration applies only to an S8500 or S8700 that serves as the primary controller for the target G700. Do not administer Communication Manager on the S8300 (LSP). Translations are automatically copied to the LSP from the S8700 primary controller after a save translations command or a data backup. If the primary controller is an S8300, skip this section and go to The Primary Controller is an S8300 on page 151. NOTE: Some of the procedures in this section should have been completed previously as part of a normal S8500 or S8700 installation. This document covers only the administration of Communication Manager required for the G700 Media Gateway to communicate with the primary controller over a customer’s network. For the majority of required administration, see ‘‘Administrator’s Guide to Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-506,’’ or ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ In this section, you will use the SAT interface to: • Assign Node Names • Define the IP Network Region • Add a Media Gateway Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 155 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager NOTE: For information on installing the CLAN boards on the S8500 or S8700 port networks and complete information on installing an S8700 Media Server, see the Installation documentation on the ‘‘Avaya S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Server Library CD, 555233-825.’’ Assign Node Names and IP Addresses for the C-LANs and LSPs NOTE: The CLAN boards must be TN799DP running version 5 or greater firmware. Be sure to check the firmware version for these boards on the S8700. For information on how to upgrade the firmware on the S8700, please see the section "Upgrade Firmware in Selected Port Cabinet Packs" in Upgrading the Avaya Media Server Configuration in the S8700 documentation portion of this documentation CD, ‘‘Avaya S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Server Library CD, 555-233-325.’’ Assign node names and IP addresses 1 At the SAT prompt, type change node-names ip to open the Node Names screen. Example Node Names Screen change node-names ip Page 1 of 1 IP NODE NAMES Name default_________ node-1-clan __ node-2-clan node-10-lsp node-11-lsp __________ __________ __________ 2 3 IP Address 0__.0__.0__.0__ 192.168.1 _.124 192.168.1 _.97_ 192.168.1 _.50_ 192.168.1 _.51_ ___.___.___. _ ___.___.___. _ ___.___.___. _ Name _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ IP Address ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ Enter the name and IP address for the C-LANs and LSPs. Press F 3 (E NT ER ) when complete. Administer Network Regions Before assigning an IP network region to a G700, you must define network region on the IP Network Region form. After a network region is defined, you can assign it to the various network elements (servers, gateways, IP phones). The information you need to do this should be provided in your planning documentation. Use the system defaults if the planning documentation does not specify otherwise. For a G700 with an S8300 LSP and an S8500 or S8700 as the primary controller, there may be more than one network region, since there can be up to 250 G700 Media Gateways connected to the S8500 or S8700 with thousands of telephones in the network. In this case, you define a network region for each CLAN board on the S8500 or S8700 port networks, though they may also have the same network region. The G700, in this case, may also share the same network region as the CLAN board(s). However, it may have a different network region because of the geographic distances of the connections between the G700 156 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager and the S8500 or S8700. The G700 network region may also differ because of the nature of the endpoints connected to it. Define IP network regions for the G700 and CLAN board(s) CAUTION: Defining IP network regions can be quite complex. For detailed information on the use and administration of IP network regions, see ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ 1 On the SAT screen of the primary controller for the G700 Media Gateway, type change ipnetwork-region , where the is the region you will assign to the G700 Media Gateway. This region number may or may not match the network region of the S8500 or S8700 CLAN boards. The system displays the IP Network Region screen. IP Network Region Screen change ip-network-region 1 Page 1 of 19 IP NETWORK REGION Region: 1 Location: Name: Home Domain: AUDIO PARAMETERS Codec Set: 1 UDP Port Min: 2048 UDP Port Max: 3028 DiffServ/TOS PARAMETERS Call Control PHB Value: 34 Audio PHB Value: 46 802.1P/Q PARAMETERS Call Control 802.1p Priority: 7 Audio 802.1p Priority: 6 H.323 IP ENDPOINTS H.323 Link Bounce Recovery? y Idle Traffic Interval (sec): 20 Keep-Alive Interval (sec): 5 Keep-Alive Count: 5 2 Intra-region IP-IP Direct Audio: yes Inter-region IP-IP Direct Audio: yes IP Audio Hairpinning? y RTCP Reporting Enabled? n RTCP MONITOR SERVER PARAMETERS Use Default Server Parameters? y AUDIO RESOURCE RESERVATION PARAMETERS RSVP Enabled? n Complete the fields as described in ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ NOTE: It is strongly recommended to use the defaults in the screen. 3 If the network region of the G700 (1 in this example) is different from that of the S8500 or S8700 CLAN board(s), you must interconnect the two regions. Press NextPage twice to display page 3, Inter Network Region Connection Management. The system displays page 3 of the IP Network Region screen. This screen shows the source region (1) and the first 15 destination network region numbers. (Pages 4–19 show destination regions 16–250). Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 157 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager IP Network Region Screen, Page 3 display ip-network-region 1 Page Inter Network Region Connection Management src rgn 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 dst rgn 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 codec-set 1 direct-WAN WAN-BW-limints 3 of 19 Intervening-regions 3 Type the number for the type of codec set (1–7) that the S8500 or S8700 will use to interconnect the G700 and the C-LAN board(s) in the row corresponding to the region of the C-LAN. In this example, the C-LAN is in region 9 and codec-set type 3 is to be used for the interconnection between region 1 and region 9. (In this example, codec type 1 is used for communication within region 1) The SAT command, list ip-codec-set, lists the types of codecs available on this server. For more detail about the Inter Network Region Connection Management form, see ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ 5 Press F 3 (E NT ER ) when complete. Assign LSPs to the Network Regions If the primary controller has LSPs, you can assign the LSPs to network regions. In the event of a network failure, IP telephones assigned to a network region will register with the LSPs assigned to that region. This procedure assigns up to six LSPs to a network region. Assign LSPs to a network region 1 On the IP Network Region screen, go to page 3. IP Network Region Screen, page 3 change ip-network-region 1 Page 2 of 19 IP Network Region LSP 1 2 3 4 5 6 158 NAMES IN PRIORITY ORDER node-10-LSP______ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager 2 Enter the names of up to six LSPs to be assigned to region 1. The LSP names must be the same as administered on the Node Names form. 3 4 Submit the form. Repeat for each network region to which you want to assign LSPs. Administer IP Interfaces Define the IP interfaces of the S8500 or S8700 port network CLAN boards NOTE: This should have already been established as a part of normal S8500 or S8700 installation. 1 Type change ip-interfaces to open the IP Interfaces screen. IP Interfaces Screen change ip-interfaces procr Page 1 of 1 IP INTERFACES Type: Slot: Code/Suffix: Node Name: IP Address: Subnet Mask: Gateway Address: Enable Ehternet Port? Nework Region: VLAN: C-LAN 01A03 TN799 d procr 135.9.41.146 255.255.255.0 135.9.41.254 y 1 0 Number of CLAN Sockets Before Warning: 400 2 Complete the fields as described the in the following table. Field Conditions/Comments Type Either C-LAN. Slot The slot location for the circuit pack. Code/Suffix Display only. This field is automatically populated with TN799 for CLAN. Node name The unique node name for the IP interface. The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen. IP Address The IP address (on the customer LAN) of the C-LAN. Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface. For more information on IP addresses and subnetting, see “Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504”. Gateway Address The address of a network node that serves as the default gateway for the IP interface. 1 of 2 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 159 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager Field Conditions/Comments Enable Ethernet Port? The Ethernet port must be enabled (y) before it can be used. The port must be disabled (n) before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen. Network Region The region number for this IP interface. VLAN The VLAN number assigned to the C-LAN, if any. Number of CLAN Sockets Before Warning The threshold for the number of sockets used by this C-LAN that triggers a warning message to be sent to the error log. 2 of 2 3 Close the screen. Administer the LSP Form If the primary server has LSPs, you must enter the LSP node names on the LSP form to enable the LSPs to get translations updates from the primary controller. Once the LSPs are successfully entered on the LSP form, their status can be viewed with the display lsp command. NOTE: The LSP node names must be administered on the node-names-ip form before they can be entered on the LSP form. Add LSP names to the LSP form 1 At the SAT prompt, type change lsp to open the LSP form. LSP Screen change lsp Number NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 160 node-10-LSP_ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ Page LOCAL SURVIVABLE PROCESSOR IP Address Service State? 192.168.1.50 in-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service 1 of 16 Translations Updated 14:21 5/4/2003 Enter the node name for each LSP supported by the primary controller and submit the form. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager Administer the Media Gateway To perform the procedures in this section, telnet to the primary controller, log in, and open a SAT session. CAUTION: Before administering a media gateway, make sure that the gateway has been fully configured. Add Media Gateway 1 At the SAT prompt, type add media-gateway where is the gateway number from 1 to n . (n is 50 for an S8300 and 250 for an S8500 or S8700). The S8300 displays the Media Gateway screen. Add Media Gateway Screen change media-gateway 1 Page 1 of 1 MEDIA GATEWAY Number: Type: Name: Serial No: Network Region: Registered? Slot V1: V2: V3: V4: 1 g700 Swainsons 012X06230551 1 n Module Type IP Address: FW Version/HW Vintage: MAC Address: Encrypt Link? Location: Controller IP Address: Site Data: Name 135.9.41.150 21.13.0 /0 y 1 V8: V9: 2 3 Complete the Name field with the hostname assigned to the G700 Media Gateway. Complete the Identifier field with the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway. You can obtain the serial number by typing the show system command at the MGP command line. CAUTION: Be sure the serial number for the G700 Media Gateway you enter in this procedure matches exactly the serial number displayed in the show system command. The serial number is casesensitive, and if entered incorrectly, will prevent the S8300 Media Server from communicating with the G700 Media Gateway. 4 5 Complete the Network Region field with the value supplied in the planning documentation. If specifically requested by the customer or your planning documents, type gatewayannouncements in the V9 field. This field allows you to enable announcements on the G700 Media Gateway. V9 is a virtual slot. There is no announcement board associated with it. The announcements for the G700 are available in the G700 firmware and are administered in the same way as announcements on the TN2301 circuit pack used on S8500 or S8700 port networks. If there are multiple G700 Media Gateways sharing announcements, then enable announcements on the G700 whose trunks will receive the announcements most often. 6 Press F3 (E NT ER ) to save your changes. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 161 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager If properly administered, the G700 should register with the primary controller within 1–2 minutes. The IP Address, MAC Address, and Module Type fields are populated automatically after the G700 Media Gateway registers with the server. 7 Type change media-gateway to view the Media Gateway form. Media Gateway Screen (After Registration with Primary Controller) change media-gateway 1 Page 1 of 1 MEDIA GATEWAY Number: Type: Name: Serial No: Network Region: Registered? Slot V1: V2: V3: V4: 1 g700 Swainsons 012X06230551 1 y Module Type S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 IP Address: 135.9.41.150 FW Version/HW Vintage: 21.13.0 /0 MAC Address: 00:04:0d:02:06:ca Encrypt Link? y Location: 1 Controller IP Address: 135.9.41.146 Site Data: Name ICC MM DCP MM ANA MM T1/E1 MM V8: V9: The media modules installed in the G700 are listed next to their slot numbers. To verify that a G700 Media Gateway has been successfully added: Verify Changes 1 At the SAT prompt, type list media-gateway. List Media-Gateway Screen list media-gateway MEDIA-GATEWAY REPORT Number 2 Name 1 LabA 2 Data MG2 Serial No/ FW Ver/HW Vint 01DR07128730 21 .13 .0 /0 02DR01130356 11 .2 .0 /0 IP Address/ Cntrl IP Addr 135.177.49.57 135.177.49.59 135.177.49.90 135.177.49.40 Type NetRgn Reg? g700 1 y g350 1 n Verify that the G700 Media Gateway has registered. The y in the registered field signifies that the G700 Media Gateway has registered. If the G700 should become unregistered, the y will become an n, but the IP address will remain assigned to the G700 Media Gateway. If the G700 has never been registered, the IP Address field will be blank. If the G700 fails to register, two common causes might be: — The serial number added as the identifier for the G700 is wrong. To check, log back into the G700 gateway and type show system. Check the serial number that appears. — There is no IP connection between the G700 and the S8300. To check, type show mgc and then ping mgp . 162 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Administer Communication Manager Enable Announcements, If Necessary 1 Only if specifically requested by the customer or your planning documents, at the SAT prompt, type enable announcement-board V9, where is the number of the G700 Media Gateway you just added and V9 is the virtual slot (for example, 2V9 means Media Gateway number 2, slot V9. 2 Press E NT ER to enable announcements. The system displays the message Command successfully completed. Save Communication Manager Translations Save translations again after all Communication Manager administration is complete. — At the SAT prompt, type save translation. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 163 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Considerations for IP Phones Supported by a Local Survivable Processor Considerations for IP Phones Supported by a Local Survivable Processor A DHCP server assigns IP addresses to IP endpoints dynamically. Avaya IP phones perform a DHCP discover request to receive an IP address, as well as receive parameters necessary to function correctly. These parameters include the location of the call control server, the location of the TFTP server, as well as the directory on the TFTP server from which the phone receives its upgrades. When preparing a DHCP server to work with Avaya IP phones, there is an option that must be administered to allow the Avaya phone to receive the DHCP offer. This option is “site-specific-optionnumber” (sson) 176. Different DHCP servers allow for this administration in different ways, but the sson option must be mapped to 176. Then the option can be set up to send the information desired to the Avaya phones for the intended activity. The sson option sends a string that includes the IP address of the Avaya Call Controller with which the phone will register (“MCIPADD=www.xxx.yyy.zzz”). In an S8500 or S8700 system, this is a CLAN address; in an S8300 system, this is the IP address of the S8300. Multiple addresses can be administered to allow for LSP failover. The second address in the MCIPADD list may be an IP address for a second S8700 CLAN board or an LSP. If a second CLAN board is used, then the third address must be the LSP, and any subsequent addresses should be alternate LSPs. Local LSPs should appear first in the list, with remote LSPs later in the list as possible back ups. If an IP phone looses its connection to the primary controller, it will try to register with an LSP associated with its network region (as defined on page 3 of the IP Network Region form). However, if the phone resets, it looses this information and goes to the DHCP server for a controller. If the only controller in the MCIPADD list is the primary controller, and if the connection to the primary controller is down, the phone cannot register. Having an LSP in the MCIPADD list gives the IP phones an alternate controller in this situation. NOTE: It is strongly recommended that at least one LSP be administered in the MCIPADD list. Also included in the sson option string is the “MCPORT=1719”. This is the port the phone will listen on for signalling traffic to the call controller. Next is the tftp server field. This field indicates to the phone where it is to receive firmware updates, along with the tftp directory field. All phones for which the DHCP server has an LSP as the second address in the MCIPADD list should be administered to be in the same network region. Or, if administered to be in different network regions, the network regions involved should be interconnected. Use the ip-network-map form on the primary controller to put the IP phones in the same network region. On the ip-network-map form, a range of IP addresses (or a subnet) can be specified to be in a single network region. Enter the IP address range, or subnet, that contains the IP addresses of the IP phones and enter the desired network region number for that address range. The same address range or subnet must then be administered on the DHCP server. If it is not desired that all the phones be in the same network region, the form “ip-network-region #” should be used to interconnect all the network regions that contain those phones. 164 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Considerations for IP Phones Supported by a Local Survivable Processor Transition of Control from Primary Controller to LSP When the network connection between the G700 and the S8500 or S8700 goes down, control of endpoints connected to the G700 goes to the next point in the primary controller list, which will be either a second CLAN board or the LSP. At this point, the S8500 or S8700 alarms to notify the customer and services personnel that the network connection between the S8500 or S8700 and G700 has problems. If control passes to the LSP, the LSP’s license allows it to support the G700 endpoints for up to 10 days, within which the network problems should be resolved. The customer must pass control back to the S8500 or S8700 manually, by selecting Shutdown this server from the S8300 web page (includes selecting the option to restart after shutdown), or a technician must run reset system 4 from the Linux command line. When the system reboots, the G700 and its endpoints reregister with the primary controller, in this case the S8500 or S8700. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 165 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Set Up SNMP Alarming on the G700 Set Up SNMP Alarming on the G700 Setting up SNMP alarm reporting involves two main tasks: • Configuring the primary server to report alarms to a services support agency • Configuring the G700 Media Gateway to send its traps to a network management system (NMS), which can be the primary server (S8300, S8500, or S8700). The primary server may be an S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server. The media server supports two methods for reporting alarms. Either, both, or no alarm-reporting method may be used at a given site. • OSS Method. The server’s software applications and hardware devices under its control can generate Operations Support System (OSS) alarms. These alarms are recorded in the server logs, and may be reported to Avaya’s Initialization and Administration System (INADS) or another services support agency over the server’s modem interface. To activate OSS alarm notification: The server requires a USB connection to a modem that is connected to an analog line. The modem must be configured using the Web Interface, in the Set Modem Interface screen, and enabled to send and receive calls using the Enable/Disable Modem screen. Configuration of the OSS alarming method can only be done using Linux shell commands. • SNMP Method. SNMP traps may be sent in User Datagram Protocol (UDP) to a corporate network management system (NMS) using the Configure Trap Destinations screen. The OSS and SNMP alarm-notification methods operate independently of each other; either or both may be used. Currently, the following NMSs are supported: — Avaya Fault and Performance Manager, as a standalone application, or integrated within — Avaya MultiService™ Network Manager — HP Openview To activate SNMP alarm notification: On the server Web Interface, use the Configure Trap Destinations screen to set up SNMP destinations in the corporate NMS. Add INADS phone numbers and Enable alarms to INADS The following procedure, using the primary server’s Linux shell commands, administers the dial-out modem to send alarms in the OSS method. In this example, the primary server is an S8300, and the services support agency is Avaya’s Initialization and Administration System (INADS). Perform this task after all Communication Manager administration is complete. NOTE: Do these steps only if the S8300 is the primary controller and the customer has a maintenance contract with Avaya. Use the information you acquired from the ART tool (see Run the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the INADS IP Address, if Necessary). Also, a USB modem must have already been installed. 1 With a direct connection to the S8300 Services port, start a Telnet session and log in as craft (or dadmin). 2 3 4 166 At the prompt, type almcall -f INADS phone number -s and press Enter. At the prompt, type almenable -d b -s y and press Enter. Type almenable and press Enter to verify that the alarms are enabled. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Set Up SNMP Alarming on the G700 5 Log off. Configure an SNMP Community String for Traps Configuring the G700 Media Gateway to send SNMP traps to the primary server can be accomplished by two commands: • P330 stack processor CLI command set snmp community trap [community string] • Media Gateway Processor (MGP) CLI command set snmp trap enable SNMP requires community strings to be used for each SNMP ’request’. You can set only three community strings on the G700 — one each for read requests, write requests, and traps. The command for traps is: set snmp community trap [community string]. 1 2 3 Telnet to the P330 stack processor. 4 Type exit Log in as root. At the P330-1(super)# prompt, type set snmp community trap [community string] and press Enter. Configure the Destination for G700 SNMP Traps Events occurring on the G700 cause SNMP traps to be generated. The G700 MGP can be configured to send SNMP traps to any network management system (NMS) in the network, including the primary server (S8300, S8500, or S8700). The MGP CLI set snmp trap command is the way to configure the NMS network element that will receive those traps. The command syntax is: set SNMP trap {enable|disable} [{all|power|temp|app|module|config|voice|operations}] where is the IP address of the NMS trap receiver that will be receiving the traps from the G700, and [{all|power|temp|app|module|config|voice|operations}] indicates the groups whose traps will be sent to the specified receiver. If no keywords follow the IP address entry, then ’all’ traps will be enabled for the specified receiver. If ’enable’ or ’disable’ is used without a trap designation keyword, then ’all’ traps is assumed. Up to ten trap receivers can be configured. 1 2 3 4 At the P330-1(super)# prompt, type session mgp At the mg-xxx-n(super-user)# prompt, type configure and press Enter. At the mg-xxx-n(configure)# prompt, type set snmp trap enable and press Enter. Type exit Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 167 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Complete the Installation of S8300 (if the Primary Controller) Complete the Installation of S8300 (if the Primary Controller) Consult the planning documentation to obtain the necessary information to complete the installation. Part of the final process will be to: • Connect and administer test endpoints • Test the endpoints • Administer Communication Manager for trunks, features, networking, or other items required by the customer. • Complete the electrical installation • Enable adjunct systems Register the system Follow the existing process and procedures to register the S8300. Back up the System 1 2 Make sure you have the IP address of the customer’s FTP backup server. On the S8300 main menu, select Backup Now. The system displays the Backup Now screen. 3 4 Select the type of data you want to back up by selecting the appropriate data set. 5 Complete the following fields: Select a backup method, normally FTP, to indicate the destination to which the system sends the backup data. User name. You must enter a valid user name to enable the media server to log in to the FTP server. If you want to use the anonymous account, type "anonymous" in this field. If you do not want to use the anonymous account, type the actual user name in this field. Password. You must enter a password that is valid for the user name you entered. If you are using anonymous as the user name, you must use your email address as the password. However, the FTP site may have a different convention. Host name. Enter the DNS name or IP address of the FTP server to which the backup data is sent. To enter an IP address, use the dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.11.13.6). Directory. Enter the directory on the corporate repository to which you want to copy the backup file. When you enter a forward slash (/) in the directory field, the system copies the backup file to the default directory. The default directory for backup data on the FTP server is /var/home/ftp. If you do not want to use the default directory, you must enter the path name for the directory. 6 Click Start Backup. The system displays the results of your backup procedure on the Backup Now results screen. 168 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Complete the Installation Process Complete the Installation Process Consult the planning documentation to obtain the necessary information to complete the installation. Part of the final process will be to: • • • • Connect and administer test endpoints. Test the endpoints. Complete the electrical installation Enable adjunct systems This completes the installation of the G700 Media Gateway with and S8300 Media Server. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 169 3 3 Installing a New G700 with an S8300 Complete the Installation Process 170 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Installation Overview 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 This chapter covers the procedures to install the firmware on an new Avaya G700 Media Gateway without an Avaya S8300 Media Server. The G700 is controlled by an external primary server running Avaya Communication Manger. The primary server can be an Avaya S8500 or S8700 Media Server or an S8300 residing in another G700. NOTE: Procedures to install or upgrade an S8500 or S8700 Media Server are not covered in this document. See Avaya S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Server Library, which is on the Avaya Support website (http://www.avaya.com/support) or on the CD, 555-233-825. Tip: The Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) performs these tasks automatically: , , Check for IP Connections, and Set the LSP Transition Points sections. However, the GIW does not configure an X330 Expansion module. This task you must still perform as described in this document. Installation Overview System Components G700 components A P330 stack processor is built into the G700 Media Gateway. (This processor is also known as the Layer 2 switching processor). The G700 also contains an MGP processor, a VoIP processor, up to four media modules, and possibly an expansion module. Installing the firmware for one or more of these processors and/or media modules is a required part of most new installations. Firmware files You should obtain the firmware files for the G700 before going on-site. You can obtain the firmware files in bundled form on a CD or you can go to the Avaya Support website and download the individual firmware files onto your services laptop. TFTP Server To install firmware on a G700 without an S8300 or LSP, you must first copy the firmware files to an external TFTP server on the customer LAN. The TFTP server can be a customer computer or it can be set up on your services laptop. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 171 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Installation Overview Initial Access to the G700 Before the P330 stack processor is configured with an IP address, the only way to access it is with a direct connection from your laptop to the Console port on the G700. With this connection, you can assign the IP addresses to the G700 processors, which can then be accessed over the customer LAN. Access to the S8300 and G700 You can access the S8300 and G700 in several ways with either a direct connection or LAN connection. NOTE: Before the Upgrade Tool can be used to upgrade software on an LSP or firmware on a G700, as summarized below, the LSP must be administered on the primary controller. Direct connection to target S8300 If you are at the location of the target S8300 (primary or LSP), you can connect directly to the S8300 Services port and: 1 Upgrade the S8300 software by — Opening the Web interface and using the Avaya Installation Wizard — Or, opening the Web interface and using the main menu 2 Upgrade the G700 firmware by — Opening the Web interface and using the Upgrade Tool — Or, telnet to the S8300 and then telnet to the P330 stack processor Direct connection to the remote primary server (S8300, S8500, or S8700) In this case, the target S8300 is an LSP. If you are at the remote location of the primary server, you can connect directly to the server’s Services port and: 1 Upgrade the S8300 (LSP) software by — Opening the Web interface and using the Upgrade Tool 2 Upgrade the G700 firmware by — Opening the Web interface and using the Upgrade Tool — Or, telnet to the primary server and then telnet to the P330 stack processor and perform the installation commands For direct connections, the TFTP server must be on the Customer LAN, not on your laptop. LAN connections If you can connect to the customer’s LAN, you can: 1 Upgrade the S8300 software by — Opening the Web interface on the S8300 and using the Avaya Installation Wizard — Or, Opening the Web interface on the S8300 and using the main menu 172 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Installation Overview 2 Upgrade the G700 firmware by — Opening the Web interface on the primary server and using the Upgrade Tool — Or, telnet to the P330 stack processor and perform the installation commands For LAN connections the TFTP server can be your laptop or a customer computer on the LAN. See "Connection and Login Methods" in Chapter 1 for details on how to connect and log into the G700. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 173 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Before Going to the Customer Site Before Going to the Customer Site The procedures in this section should be completed before going to the customer site or before starting a remote installation. Off-site Tasks Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager The project manager should provide you with forms that contain all the information needed to prepare for this installation. The information primarily consists of IP addresses, subnet mask addresses, logins, passwords, people to contact, the type of system, and equipment you need to install. Verify that the information provided by the project manager includes all the information requested in your planning forms. Tip: Appendix B, Information Checlists, provides several checklists to help you gather the installation and upgrade information. Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary For an upgrade of an existing G700, the existing license file can usually be reused. However, if the customer is adding feature functionality (for example, adding BRI trunks), or if the upgrade is between major releases (for example, 1.3 to 2.0), you will need the serial number of the G700. To get this number, ask the customer’s administrator to log in to the S8300 web page and select View License Status from the main menu to display the serial number. For a new installation, you need the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway in order to complete the creation of the customer’s license file on the rfa.avaya.com web site. To get this number, look for the serial number sticker on the back of the G700 chassis. If the unit is delivered directly to the customer and you will not have phone or LAN line access from the customer site to access the rfa.avaya.com web site, this task will require a preliminary trip to the customer site. Set Up the TFTP Server on Your Laptop or on a Customer PC, if Necessary A tar.gz file, which you obtain from a CD-ROM or a website, contains new G700 software. To load this software on a G700 Media Gateway, you must place this tar.gz file either on your laptop or on a PC connected to the customer’s LAN. Later, you will log in to the G700 and use its TFTP capability to pull the new software from your laptop or the customer’s PC. As a result, either the customer must configure a TFTP server on a PC connected to the customer’s LAN or you, the installer, must set up your laptop as a TFTP server and later connect it to the customer’s LAN. 174 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Before Going to the Customer Site NOTE: A Linux or Unix TFTP server should be used only if the customer already has an existing one. In these cases, you download the tar.gz file to your laptop and give it to the customer for proper placement and execution. 1 On the hard drive of your laptop or the customer’s PC, create a directory into which you will load the G700 software. It is recommended that you create a directory called C:\tftp. 2 Connect to the LAN using a browser on your laptop or the customer’s PC and access http:// www.avaya.com/support on the Internet. 3 At the Avaya support site, select the following sequence of menu options: > Software & Firmware Downloads > Telephones and End User Devices >4600 Series IP Telephones > Software Downloads 4 Double-click on one of the links listed with "TFTP Server"; for example, 4630 IP Telephone R 1.73 and TFTP Server. 5 6 Scroll to bottom of page to find the TFTP Server Application file, iptel_avaya_tftp.exe. 7 You may also wish to download and view or print the file iptel.pdf, which provides instructions on installing the iptel_avaya_tftp.exe for Windows servers. 8 After downloading the iptel_avaya_tftp.exe file to the PC, double-click it and follow instructions to install it. By default, the installation program creates the directory, C:\Program Files\Walusoft\TFTPSuite that contains the application files. 9 When the file has been installed, go to the directory where the software was installed and doubleclick the file tftpserver32.exe to open the program. Double-click on the program and download it to your laptop or the customer PC that will serve as the TFTP server. Remember where the iptel_avaya_tftp.exe file is installed on your laptop or PC and write it down. The TFTP Server window appears. It reflects the IP address of the PC in the upper border, plus port 69. 10 Enable the TFTP server as follows: — Click on System from menu bar and select setup. — The server option window appears. — Select the Outbound tab, and enter C:\tftp - (or your alternate tftp location) for the outbound file path. — Under Options tab, enter 69 in the Use Port field (default). — Select No Incoming (default). However, if you wish to copy files as a backup prior to performing an upgrade of software, leave this field unchecked. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 175 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Before Going to the Customer Site — Select the Inbound tab, and enter C:\tftp (or your alternate tftp location) for the inbound file path. — Click OK. Download G700 Firmware Files to Your TFTP Directory To install new firmware for the G700 processors and the media modules, you first need to move the new firmware files to a directory on the TFTP server. The installation program reads the new firmware files from this directory on the TFTP server. Perform one of the two procedures in this section, depending on whether you have a bundled tar.gz file on a CD or wish to download individual firmware files from the Avaya Support website. For a Bundled Firmware File NOTE: Your laptop (or the customer’s PC) must have WinZip or other file zipping software for this procedure. Copy the tar.gz File from CD-ROM to Your TFTP Directory and Unzip It 1 2 Insert the G700 software CD into your laptop or PC CD-ROM drive. 3 Copy the tar.gz file (G700-11.3-0009.0.tar.gz or similar identifier) to the C:\tftp directory (or your alternate tftp location). 4 Use winZIP or another zipfile tool to unzip the file. You may need to unzip an additional tar.gz file embedded in the original file. You should continue to unzip tar.gz files until you see listed files with extensions as shown in the table "Firmware File Formats" below. Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to access the files on the CDROM drive. For Individual Firmware Files Download the Firmware Files from the Web to Your TFTP Directory NOTE: The sequence of links on the website may be somewhat different than described here. 1 2 Access the www.avaya.com/support website. At the Avaya support site, click on Software & Firmware Downloads and then click on the following sequence: > G700 Media Gateway & S8300 Media Server. > Firmware Downloads > G700 Firmware Downloads. The system displays a list of firmware files. 3 176 Locate the file names that match the files listed in your planning documentation. The file names will approximate those listed in the following table: Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Before Going to the Customer Site Firmware File Formats 4 Component Firmware Version Format Example P330 Stack Processor viisa viisa3_12_1.exe P330 Stack Processor p330 p330Tweb.3.8.6.exe G700 Media Gateway mgp mgp_8_0.bin VoIP Media Module and Motherboard VoIP mm760 mm760v3.fdl DCP Media Module mm712 mm712v2.fdl Analog Port/Trunk Media Module mm711 mm711v4.fdl E1/T1 Media Module mm710 mm710v3.fdl BRI Media Module mm720 mm720v2.fdl Double-click the file name. The system displays a File Download window. 5 6 7 Click on Save this file to disk. Save the file to the C:\tftp directory (or your alternate tftp location). Use Winzip or another zip file tool to unzip the file, if necessary. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 177 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Configure the G700 Tip: The Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) performs tasks automatically in the , , Check for IP Connections, and Set the LSP Transition Points sections. However, the GIW does not configure an X330 Expansion module. This task you must still perform as described in this document. For a new installation of a G700 Media Gateway, you must complete the following configuration tasks: • Assign IP addresses to the G700 processors • Assign IP routes for the gateway • Set up the controller list Assign the IP Addresses of the G700 Media Gateway Components NOTE: The Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) performs this task automatically. This section describes how to assign the IP addresses and IP routes to the G700 Media Gateway and its components. The IP addresses should be available to you on the IP Addressing Planning Form. The command arguments you will be supplying include: vlan –Virtual Local Area Network: a defined network segment that allows users on that segment to have priority services in sharing information with each other. If the network is not using VLANs, the VLAN should be 1. Otherwise, use the VLAN numbers indicated in your planning forms. The G700 Media Gateway should be assigned the same VLAN as the VLAN to which the Ethernet ports are connected. The P330 stack processor might or might not be assigned to the customer’s network management VLAN. IP address –the unique identifier assigned to an entity on the customer LAN netmask –the subnet mask for the customer’s LAN segment destination –distant networks that the IP route command needs to send packets to. Usually generalized to 0.0.0.0 for networks other than the local segment. default gateway –the gateway the ip route command specifies to get to the distant networks Access the P330 stack processor 178 1 Set up a direct connection to the G700 Console (serial) port and access the P330 stack processor using Hyperterm (or similar terminal emulation application). 2 Login as root. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Assign the IP address to the P330 stack processor CAUTION: The nvram init command initializes the switch parameters to the factory defaults. This command is normally used only for new installations. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initialize NVRAM: type nvram init Change mode to configure: type configure At the P330-1(super)# prompt, type configure. At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type set interface inband to assign an IP address to the P330 stack processor. is the vlan number, usually 1, to be established on the S8300 for the G700 Media Gateways. The is the assigned addresses for the P330 stack processor. Type reset and press Enter to reset the stack. Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. All LEDs will flash. As the unit powers up, self-tests will be run. When the G700 mpg or P330 stack processor has reset, login again to continue. 7 Login at the Welcome to P330 menu. The prompt P330-1(super)# appears. 8 Type configure to obtain the P330-1(configure)# prompt. Establish the IP Routing for the Stack 1 Type show interface inband to verify that the Avaya P330 stack server (Layer 2 Switching Processor) has the correct address. 2 Type set ip route 0.0.0.0 to set the destination and gateway IP addresses. You will find these addresses in the planning documentation. is the IP address of the customer’s network gateway. 3 4 Press Enter to save the destination and gateway IP addresses. Type show ip route. The route net and route host tables appear. Verify that the information is correct. Check the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway processor After you have configured the P330 stack processor, you will assign an IP address to the G700 Media Gateway Processor (MGP). Your first step is to check the serial number of the MGP. 1 2 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type show system to list various attributes of the G700. The system displays a list of attributes, as shown in the following example: Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 179 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Show System List for G700 Media Gateway MG-001-1(super)# show sys Uptime(d,h:m:s): 1, 08:17:12 System Name : System Location: System Contact : MAC Address : Serial No : Model No : HW Vintage : HW Suffix : FW Vintage : -- Empty --- Empty --- Empty -00-04-0D-02-04-EF 02DR07428721 G700 00 A 230 Media Gateway Power Supplies VOLTAGE(V) ACTUAL(V) STATUS ---------- ---------- ---------DSP Complex 3.4 3.359 OK MGP 5.1 5.000 OK Fans 1.2 0.000 OK Media Modules -48.0 -47.259 OK VoIP DSP 1.6 1.570 OK VoIP 8260 2.5 2.470 OK Aux -48.0 0.000 OK --type q to quit or space key to continue-MG-???-1(super)# 3 Write the serial number on your planning document. Make sure it matches the serial number sticker on the back of the G700 Media Gateway chassis. If there is a difference, the serial number in the displayed list is correct.You will need this later. Assign the IP Address to the G700 Media Gateway Processor 1 2 At the MG-???-n(super)# prompt, type configure to change to configuration mode. Type nvram init to recondition the processor. This procedure re initializes the G700 software back to factory defaults so new IP addresses can be stored correctly in the software. It also clears all configuration and administration on the G700 Media Gateway. The system prompts you to verify that you want to erase the configuration. 3 Answer the prompt by typing y(es). The G700 Media Gateway re initializes. 4 5 6 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure to change to configuration mode. Type set interface mgp to assign an IP address to the G700 Media Gateway. is the vlan to be established on the customer’s local network. This is usually 1. The is the assigned addresses for the G700 Media Gateway. CAUTION: If this G700 contains an S8300 configured as an LSP, use the VLAN administered on the primary controller. 7 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type reset mgp. A system prompt asks to confirm the reset. 180 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 8 Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. The prompt will change to P330-1(configure)# The G700 Media Gateway processor will reset. The LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway and the Media Modules will flash. These elements will each conduct a series of self-tests. When the LEDs on the Media Modules are extinguished and the active status LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway are on, the reset is complete. 9 10 11 When the mgp reset is complete, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure to reach the configuration level of the command line interface. Type show interface mgp to verify that the G700 Media Gateway has the correct IP address. Assign an IP Route for the Default Gateway The default gateway is a router or switch that routes packets to destinations outside of the local subnetwork. 1 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type set ip route . Both and are 0.0.0.0 for the default gateway. is the IP address of the router or switch that is designated to handle packets addressed to destinations outside of the local subnetwork. 2 3 Type show ip route mgp to view the results. Repeat <~Link>step 1 for additional ip routes, if needed. Usually, only a default route is needed. Refer to your planning document. Assign IP Addresses to the VoIP Resources From the G700 Media Gateway Processor command line interface, you will assign IP addresses to the VoIP resource resident on the G700 Media Gateway and to any installed MM760 VoIP Media Modules. 1 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type set interface voip For example: set interface voip v0 132.236.73.3 is the slot number of the VoIP media module. v0 designates the VoIP resource resident on the G700 Media Gateway motherboard. The MM760 VoIP Media Modules are designated according the slot (for example, v1, v2, v3, v4) in which the Media Module has been installed. is the IP address of the VoIP resource. 2 Type show interface to display a table of all configured interfaces, including all VoIP Media Modules. 3 Type show voip v0 to display the VoIP resource on the motherboard. NOTE: It is not necessary to configure the VLAN, netmask, or IP routes for VoIP engines. The media gateway parameters are applied automatically. Check for IP Connections After you have assigned IP addresses to the P330 Stack Processor (Layer 2 Switching Processor), the G700 Media Gateway MGP, Media Modules, and the VoIP resources, do the following procedure to validate the IP connections. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 181 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Run the ping command 1 At the MG-???-n(config)# prompt, type ping mgp where is the address of an S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server, the VoIP engine, or any other functioning endpoint accessible on the customer’s LAN. It is recommended to ping endpoints on both the same subnet and a different subnet. Ping results appear on the screen, similar to the following example. Ping MGP Results MG-???-1(configure)# ping mgp 135.122.49.55 PING 135.122.49.55: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=3. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=4. time=0. ms ----135.122.49.55 PING Statistics---5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0 2 3 Check that the same number of packets transmitted were also received. Type ping voip v0 , where is the address of the G700, or any other functioning endpoint on the customer’s LAN. Ping results appear on the screen, similar to the following example. Ping VoIP Results MG-???-1(configure)# ping voip v0 135.122.49.55 ----135.122.49.55 PING Statistics---5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0 packet loss round-trip(ms) min/avg/max = 0/1/0 182 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Assign the IP Addresses of the G700 Media Gateway Components Tip: The Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) performs this task automatically. This section describes how to assign the IP addresses and IP routes to the G700 Media Gateway and its components. The IP addresses should be available to you on the IP Addressing Planning Form. The command arguments you will be supplying include: vlan –Virtual Local Area Network: a defined network segment that allows users on that segment to have priority services in sharing information with each other. If the network is not using VLANs, the VLAN should be 1. Otherwise, use the VLAN numbers indicated in your planning forms. The G700 Media Gateway should be assigned the same VLAN as the VLAN to which the Ethernet ports are connected. The P330 stack processor might or might not be assigned to the customer’s network management VLAN. IP address –the unique identifier assigned to an entity on the customer LAN netmask –the subnet mask for the customer’s LAN segment destination –distant networks that the IP route command needs to send packets to. Usually generalized to 0.0.0.0 for networks other than the local segment. default gateway –the gateway the ip route command specifies to get to the distant networks Access the P330 stack processor 1 Set up a direct connection to the G700 Console (serial) port and access the P330 stack processor using Hyperterm (or similar terminal emulation application). 2 Login as root. Assign the IP address to the P330 stack processor 1 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type set interface inband to assign an IP address to the P330 stack processor. is the vlan number, usually 1, to be established on the S8300 for the G700 Media Gateways. The is the assigned addresses for the P330 stack processor. 2 3 Type reset and press Enter to reset the stack. Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. All LEDs will flash. As the unit powers up, self-tests will be run. When the G700 mpg or P330 stack processor has reset, login again to continue. 4 Login at the Welcome to P330 menu. The prompt P330-1(super)# appears. 5 Type configure to obtain the P330-1(configure)# prompt. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 183 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Establish the IP Routing for the Stack 1 Type show interface inband to verify that the Avaya P330 stack server (Layer 2 Switching Processor) has the correct address. 2 Type set ip route 0.0.0.0 to specify the gateway to handle addresses outside of the local subnet. is the IP address of the customer’s default network gateway. This address should be available in the planning documentation. 3 4 Press Enter to save the destination and gateway IP addresses. Type show ip route. The route net and route host tables appear. Verify that the information is correct. Check the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway processor After you have configured the P330 stack processor, you will assign an IP address to the G700 Media Gateway Processor (MGP). Your first step is to check the serial number of the MGP. 1 2 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type show system to list various attributes of the G700. The system displays a list of attributes, as shown in the following example: Show System List for G700 Media Gateway MG-001-1(super)# show sys Uptime(d,h:m:s): 1, 08:17:12 System Name : System Location: System Contact : MAC Address : Serial No : Model No : HW Vintage : HW Suffix : FW Vintage : -- Empty --- Empty --- Empty -00-04-0D-02-04-EF 02DR07428721 G700 00 A 230 Media Gateway Power Supplies VOLTAGE(V) ACTUAL(V) STATUS ---------- ---------- ---------DSP Complex 3.4 3.359 OK MGP 5.1 5.000 OK Fans 1.2 0.000 OK Media Modules -48.0 -47.259 OK VoIP DSP 1.6 1.570 OK VoIP 8260 2.5 2.470 OK Aux -48.0 0.000 OK --type q to quit or space key to continue-MG-???-1(super)# 3 184 Write the serial number on your planning document. Make sure it matches the serial number sticker on the back of the G700 Media Gateway chassis. If there is a difference, the serial number in the displayed list is correct.You will need this later. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Assign the IP Address to the G700 Media Gateway Processor If, after you have assigned an IP address to the G700 processor, you telnet directly to the G700 Media Gateway processor, you will need to login, and the login name and password will be provided in the planning documentation. 1 2 At the MG-???-n(super)# prompt, type configure to change to configuration mode. Type nvram init to recondition the processor. (This command ensures that any existing configuration information is cleared so you can enter the IP address and IP route information). The system prompts you to verify that you want to erase the configuration. 3 Answer the prompt by typing y(es). This procedure re initializes the G700 software back to factory defaults so new IP addresses can be stored correctly in the software. It also clears all configuration and administration on the G700 Media Gateway. The G700 Media Gateway re initializes. 4 5 6 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure to change to configuration mode. Type set interface mgp to assign an IP address to the G700 Media Gateway. is the vlan to be established on the customer’s local network. This is usually 1. The is the assigned addresses for the G700 Media Gateway. CAUTION: If this G700 contains an S8300 configured as an LSP, use the VLAN administered on the primary controller. 7 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type reset mgp. A system prompt asks to confirm the reset. 8 Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. The G700 Media Gateway processor will reset. The LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway and the media modules will flash. These elements will each conduct a series of self-tests. When the LEDs on the media modules are extinguished and the active status LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway are on, the reset is complete. 9 10 11 12 Log in again at the Welcome to P330 menu. At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure to reach the configuration level of the command line interface. Type show interface mgp to verify that the G700 Media Gateway has the correct IP address. Assign the Default IP Route to the G700 Media Gateway 1 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type set ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 to specify the gateway to handle addresses outside of the local subnet. is the IP address of the default network gateway. This address should be available in the planning documentation. 2 Type show ip route mgp to view the results. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 185 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 3 Repeat Step 1 for additional ip routes, if needed. Usually, only a default route is needed. Refer to your planning document. Assign IP Addresses to the VoIP Resources From the G700 Media Gateway Processor command line interface, you will assign IP addresses to the VoIP resource resident on the G700 Media Gateway and to any installed MM760 VoIP Media Modules. 1 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type set interface voip is the slot number of the VoIP media module. v0 designates the VoIP resource resident on the G700 Media Gateway motherboard. The MM760 VoIP Media Modules are designated according the slot (for example, v1, v2, v3, v4) in which the media module has been installed. is the IP address of the VoIP resource. For example: set interface voip v0 132.236.73.3 2 Type show interface to display a table of all configured interfaces, including all VoIP Media Modules. 3 Type show voip v0 to display the VoIP resource on the motherboard. NOTE: It is not necessary to configure the VLAN, netmask, or IP routes for VoIP engines. The media gateway parameters are applied automatically. Check for IP Connections After you have assigned IP addresses to the P330 Stack Processor (Layer 2 Switching Processor), the G700 Media Gateway MGP, media modules, and the VoIP resources, do the following procedure to validate the IP connections. Run the ping command 1 At the MG-???-n(config)# prompt, type ping mgp where is the address of an S8300, S8500, or S8700 Media Server, the VoIP engine, or any other functioning endpoint accessible on the customer’s LAN. It is recommended to ping endpoints on both the same subnet and a different subnet. Ping results appear on the screen, similar to the following example. Ping MGP Results MG-???-1(configure)# ping mgp 135.122.49.55 PING 135.122.49.55: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=3. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 135.122.49.55: icmp_seq=4. time=0. ms ----135.122.49.55 PING Statistics---5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0 2 186 Check that the same number of packets transmitted were also received. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 3 Type ping voip v0 , where is the address of the G700, or any other functioning endpoint on the customer’s LAN. Ping results appear on the screen, similar to the following example. Ping VoIP Results MG-???-1(configure)# ping voip v0 135.122.49.55 ----135.122.49.55 PING Statistics---5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0 packet loss round-trip(ms) min/avg/max = 0/1/0 Set up the Controller List for the G700 Media Gateway NOTE: The Avaya Gateway Installation Wizard (GIW) performs this task automatically. To complete the configuration of the G700 Media Gateway, you need to administer a list of primary and alternate controllers. This list begins with the IP address of the primary controller. In the event that the G700 Media Gateway loses contact with its primary controller, it will seek to re-register with the primary controller first, then with the other controllers on this list. The other controllers are S8500 or S8700 Media Servers that can act as the primary controller, or S8300 Media Servers configured as Local Survivable Processors (LSPs). Up to four IP addresses separated by commas can be entered to form the controller list. 1 At the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt, type the following commands to designate the primary, secondary, and LSP controllers for this G700: clear mgc list set mgc list [, [, [, ]]] where, the first is the IP address of the primary controller for this G700. If the primary controller is an S8700, this is the IP address of a C-LAN board that is connected to a pair of duplicated S8700s. If the Primary controller is an S8300, this is the IP address of the S8300. The next three parameters are optional IP addresses of up to three alternate controllers. Each of the three optional controllers can be an S8700 duplicated pair or an S8300 configured as an LSP, depending on the G700’s primary controller. CAUTION: If you need to change the mgc list, you must run clear mgc list before running set mgc list again. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 187 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 The following table describes the possible optional controllers for an S8300 and S8700 primary controller: Primary Server Controller IP Addresses First: IP address of the S8300 primary controller. S8300 Next three: one, two, or three IP addresses of S8300s configured as LSPs. First: IP address of the C-LAN for the S8500 or S8700 primary S8500 or S8700 controller. Next three: one, two, or three IP addresses of alternate C-LANs and/or LSPs. For an S8500 or S8700 primary controller, the last three IP addresses in the list can be either the addresses of C-LANS (which are connected to the same S8500 or pair of S8700s that act as primary controllers) or addresses of LSPs. If you enter a combination of both, you must list CLANs first and the LSPs last, after the C-LANs. 2 Type reset mgp at the MG-???-n(configure)# prompt to reset the G700 Media Gateway processor. A system prompt asks to confirm the reset. 3 Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. The G700 Media Gateway processor will reset. The LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway and the Media Modules will flash. These elements will each conduct a series of self-tests. When the LEDs on the Media Modules are extinguished and the active status LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway are on, the reset is complete. The system ultimately returns you to the P330-1 (configure) prompt. At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-001-1(super)# prompt, type configure to change to the configuration mode. NOTE: Because the G700 media gateway has registered with its primary controller, the prompt name has changed; for example, to MG-001-1. Type show mgc to display the list of available servers and their IP addresses. For example: 188 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Show Call Controller Status Screen MG-001-1(configure)# show mgc CALL CONTROLLER STATUS -----------------------------------------Registered : YES Active Controller : 135.9.71.95 H248 Link Status : UP H248 Link Error Code: 0x0 MGC List Management : Static CONFIGURED MGC HOST -------------------135.9.71.95 - Not Available -- Not Available -- Not Available -- DHCP SPECIFIED MGC HOST ------------------------ Not Available --- Not Available --- Not Available --- Not Available -- The Gateway will have registered with the primary controller, if present. If the primary controller is running and has been administered properly, the Registered field says YES and the H248 Link Status says UP. If the controller is not running, the Registered field says NO and the H248 Link Status says DOWN. Set the LSP Transition Points You must set the time that the G700 searches, in the event of a network problem, for primary controllers (for example, additional CLAN connections) with which to register. After this search time has elapsed, the G700 will search for an LSP with which to register. You must also set the total time the G700 searches for either a primary controller and an LSP, after which the G700 resets. And finally, you must define how many primary controllers, from 1 to 4, are in the controller list you just defined. 1 At the MG-001-1(configure)# prompt, type set mgp reset-times primary-search where is the time in minutes that the G700 searches for a primary controller before looking for an LSP. The range is from 1 to 60. 2 At the MG-001-1(configure)# prompt, type set mgp reset-times total-search where is the time in minutes that the G700 searches for both primary controllers or LSPs. The range is from 1 to 60. 3 At the MG-001-1(configure)# prompt, type set mgp reset-times transition-point <#_of_primary> where <#_of_primary> is the number of primary controllers in the controller list. If the primary controller is an S8500 or S8700, the range is from 1 to 4. If the primary controller is an S8300, <#_of_primary> must be 1. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 189 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Configure the G700 Configure an X330 Expansion Module (If Necessary) NOTE: You cannot use the IW to perform this task. 1 See the Avaya X330W-2DS1 Access Router Module Quick Start Guide. This document is available at the Avaya Support website: Support > Technical Database > LAN, Backbone, and Edge Access Switches > P330 Stackable Switching System > All Documents 2 190 Select the Quick Start Guide for X330WAN 2DS1 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Prepare to Install Firmware on the G700 Prepare to Install Firmware on the G700 Before installing new firmware on the G700 processors and medial modules need to: • Have the firmware files loaded on a TFTP server • Determine which G700 components need new firmware as described in this section. Access the P330 Stack Processor See Connection and Login Methods on page 45 for details on how to set up a connection and login. Log on to the P330 stack processor using one of the following methods: • Using a LAN connection, telnet to the IP address of the P330 stack processor and log in. • If you are not using your laptop as the TFTP server, you can connect your Laptop directly to the G700 Console (Serial) Port. Then use HyperTerm or a similar terminal emulation application to log in to the P330 stack processor Command Line Interface. You are now logged-in at the Supervisor level with prompt P330-1(super)#. Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory Before proceeding with the G700 firmware installation, you should check the tftpboot directory on the TFTP server to make sure the firmware versions match those listed in the planning documentation. Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 Conduct the following procedure to compare software versions running on the G700 processors and media modules with the versions in you planning documents. If the versions do not match, new firmware for those components is necessary. Determine if new firmware for the P330 stack processor is necessary. 1 At either the P330-1(super)# or P330-1(configure)# prompt, type dir. The system displays the list of software. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 191 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Prepare to Install Firmware on the G700 Directory List for P300 Processor M# -1 1 1 1 file ---module-config stack-config EW_Archive Booter_Image ver num ------N/A N/A 3.8.6 3.2.5 file type ---------Running Conf Running Conf SW Web Image SW BootImage file location ------------Ram Ram NV-Ram NV-Ram file description ---------------Module Configuration Stack Configuration WEB Download Booter Image 2 Check the version number (ver num) of the EW_Archive file to see if it matches the Release Letter. If not, you must upgrade the P330 stack processor. 3 Type show image version The system displays the list of software. Show Image Version List for P330 Processor Mod -----3 3 4 Module-Type ----------Avaya G700 Media Gateway Avaya G700 Media Gateway Bank Version ---- ------A 0.0.0 B 3.9.0 Check the version number of the stack software image file in Band B to see if it matches the your planning document. If not, you must upgrade the P330 stack processor. Determine if new firmware is required for the MGP, VoIP Module, and installed media modules. 1 2 Type session mgp At the MG-001-1(super)# prompt, type show mg list_config The system displays the list of software. Show MG List_Config eyp SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 3 192 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------210(B) 00 52 12 54 VOIP FW ------2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Refer to the list to check the FW vintage number of the G700. In the TYPE column, find G700, then check the matching field in the FW VINTAGE column to see if it matches the vintage number in your planning forms. If not, you must install new firmware on the G700 Media Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Prepare to Install Firmware on the G700 Gateway. Also check if the release number in the FW VINTAGE column contains (A) or (B) to designate the software bank. If the list shows B, you will upgrade A. If the list shows A, you will upgrade B. 4 Refer to the VOIP FW column and row for slot V0 (same row occupied by the G700 information) to see if the number matches the VoIP firmware identified in your planning forms. If not, you must also upgrade the G700 Media Gateway motherboard VoIP module. NOTE: The VoIP processor on the motherboard is upgraded using the same firmware image file as the VoIP media modules; for example, the file mm760v8.fdl is vintage #8. 5 Check the FW VINTAGE column for vintages of each of the installed Media Modules: MM710, MM711, MM712, MM720, and/or MM760 to see if they match the FW vintages in the planning forms. If not, you must upgrade them, as well. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 193 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Follow the procedures in this section to install firmware on the G700 processors and media modules. Firmware Installation Procedures Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor Install P330 stack processor firmware 1 Access the P330 stack processor. 1 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type copy tftp SW_image EW_archive where is the full-path name for the image file with format and vintage number similar to viisa3_8_2.exe, is the full-path name for the embedded web application file with format similar to p330Tweb.3.8.6.exe, is the IP address of the TFTP server, and is the number, 1 through 10, of the media gateway in the stack. If there is only one G700 Media Gateway, the number is 1. 2 To verify that the download was successful when the prompt returns: — type show image version and check the version number in the Version column for Bank B. — type dir and check the version number in the ver num column for the EW_Archive file. 3 Type reset Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor Install MGP firmware 194 1 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp to reach the G700 Media Gateway processor. 2 Type configure at the MG-???-1(super)# prompt to enter configuration mode, which will change the prompt to MG-???-1(configure)#. 3 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type show mgp bootimage to determine which disk partition (bank) is in the Active Now column. You will update the bank that is not listed as Active Now. The system displays the following screen: Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Example: Show mgp bootimage FLASH MEMORY Bank A Bank B IMAGE VERSION 109 210 ACTIVE NOW Bank B ACTIVE AFTER REBOOT Bank B 4 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type copy tftp mgp-image to transfer the mgp image from the tftp server to the G700, where is the bank that is not Active Now (Bank A in the example). is the full path name of the mgp firmware image file, which begins with mgp and will be similar to the name mgp_8_0.bin. is the IP address of the S8300. See the following example: copy tftp mgp-image a mgp_8_0.bin 195.123.49.54. The screen will show the progress. 5 Type set mgp bootimage where is the same letter you entered in the previous step. 6 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type reset mgp. A system prompt asks to confirm the reset. 7 Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. The G700 Media Gateway processor will reset. The LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway and the Media Modules will flash. These elements will each conduct a series of self-tests. When the LEDs on the Media Modules are extinguished and the active status LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway are on, the reset is complete. 8 9 10 When the P330-1(super)# prompt appears, type session mgp. At the MGP-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure. Verify that the download was successful when the prompt returns. Type show mg list_config. The system displays the list of software. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 195 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Example: Show mg list_config SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------230(A) 00 58 57 58 VOIP FW ------67 N/A N/A N/A N/A Install New Firmware on the Media Modules For upgrades of active media modules, you need to take the media modules out of service before initiating the upgrade process. To do this, go to a SAT session on the primary controller and issue a busyout command. NOTE: Skip this busyout procedure if the media modules are not in service; for example during an initial installation. Busyout board (for active media modules) 1 Go to a SAT session on the primary controller and enter the command, busyout board vx where x is the slot number of the media module to be upgraded. 2 3 Verify the response, Command Successfully Completed. Repeat for each media module to be upgraded. Install media module firmware 1 Be sure that you have checked for the current vintage of the VoIP Module for the v0 slot (on the G700 motherboard) (see Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700). This VoIP module does not occupy a physical position like other Media Modules. 2 3 4 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. At the MG-001-1(super)# prompt, type configure to change to the configuration mode. Type copy tftp mm-image v where is the slot of the specific media module as identified when you performed Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700, the full-path name of the media module firmware file in a format such mm712v58.fdl, and is the ip address of the S8300. Two or three minutes will be required for most upgrades. The VoIP Media Module upgrade takes approximately 5 minutes. Screen messages indicate when the transfer is complete. 196 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway 5 After you have upgraded all the media modules, verify that the new versions are present. At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type show mg list_config The list of software appears Show MG List_Config SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------230(A) 00 58 57 58 VOIP FW ------67 N/A N/A N/A N/A 6 In the TYPE column, find the particular media module (v1 through v4), then check the matching field in the FW VINTAGE column to see if it matches the planning documentation. Note that slot V1 can contain either a media module or the S8300, which will show as Type "ICC". 7 Check the VOIP FW column and row for slot v0 to see if the number matches the VoIP firmware identified in the planning documentation. 8 9 Type reset where is the number of the G700 in the stack. When the reset is finished, type show mm to verify the upgrade. Release board (if media module was busied out) 1 When the upgrade procedure is complete, go to the SAT session and release the board: type release board vx where x is the slot number of the upgraded media module. 2 Verify the response, Command Successfully Completed. NOTE: If you see the response, Board Not Inserted, this means that the media module is still rebooting. Wait one minute and repeat the release board command. 3 Repeat the release board command for each media module that was busied out. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 197 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager Administer Communication Manager Perform one of the two administration procedures in this section: • When the The Primary Controller is an S8300, or • When the The Primary Controller is an S8500 or S8700 The Primary Controller is an S8300 This document covers only the administration of Communication Manager required for the G700 Media Gateway to communicate with the primary controller over a customer’s network. For the majority of administration required, see ‘‘Administrator’s Guide to Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-506,’’ or ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ In this section, you will use the SAT interface to: • Assign Node Names for LSPs • Define the IP Network Region • Add a Media Gateway. CAUTION: Before continuing, be sure you have saved translations in Communication Manager. Reset the System 1 2 Telnet to the S8300, log in, and open a SAT session (type sat or dsat). At the SAT prompt, type reset system 4 The system reboots. 3 After the reboot is complete, telnet to the S8300, login, and open a SAT session. Assign Node Names and IP Addresses for the LSPs If the S8300 network configuration includes LSPs, they must be specifiied on the Node Names form. Assign node names 1 At the S8300 SAT prompt, type change node-names ip to open the Node Names screen. Example Node Names Screen change node-names ip Page 1 of 1 IP NODE NAMES Name default_________ node-10-lsp node-11-lsp __________ __________ __________ 198 IP Address 0__.0__.0__.0__ 192.168.1 _.50_ 192.168.1 _.51_ ___.___.___. _ ___.___.___. _ ___.___.___. _ Name _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ IP Address ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager 2 3 Enter the name and IP addresses for the LSPs. Press F 3 (E NT ER ) when complete. Administer Network Regions Before assigning an IP network region to a G700, you must define network region on the IP Network Region form. After a network region is defined, you can assign it to the various network elements (servers, gateways, IP phones). The information you need to do this should be provided in your planning documentation. Use the system defaults if the planning documentation does not specify otherwise. For a G700 with an S8300 as primary controller, there will usually be one network region, defined as 1. The procedure below uses 1 for the network region number as an example but the procedure applies for any network region number from 1 to 250. Define IP network region 1 CAUTION: Defining IP network regions can be quite complex. For detailed information on the use and administration of IP network regions, see ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ 1 At the SAT prompt, type change ip-network-region 1. The S8300 displays the IP Network Region screen. IP Network Region Screen change ip-network-region 1 Page 1 of 19 IP NETWORK REGION Region: 1 Location: Name: Home Domain: AUDIO PARAMETERS Codec Set: 1 UDP Port Min: 2048 UDP Port Max: 3028 DiffServ/TOS PARAMETERS Call Control PHB Value: 34 Audio PHB Value: 46 802.1P/Q PARAMETERS Call Control 802.1p Priority: 7 Audio 802.1p Priority: 6 H.323 IP ENDPOINTS H.323 Link Bounce Recovery? y Idle Traffic Interval (sec): 20 Keep-Alive Interval (sec): 5 Keep-Alive Count: 5 2 Intra-region IP-IP Direct Audio: yes Inter-region IP-IP Direct Audio: yes IP Audio Hairpinning? y RTCP Reporting Enabled? n RTCP MONITOR SERVER PARAMETERS Use Default Server Parameters? y AUDIO RESOURCE RESERVATION PARAMETERS RSVP Enabled? n If necessary, complete the fields as described in ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ NOTE: It is strongly recommended to use the defaults in the screen. However, for the RTCP Enabled and RSVP Enabled fields, the entry should be n (no). Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 199 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager 3 Press F 3 (E NT ER ) to submit the screen. Associate LSPs with Network Regions If the primary controller has LSPs, you can associate each LSP with one or more network regions. In the event of a network failure, IP telephones assigned to a network region will register with an LSP associated with that region. This procedure associates up to six LSPs with a network region. Associate LSPs with a network region 1 On the IP Network Region screen, go to page 2. IP Network Region Screen, page 3 change ip-network-region 1 Page 2 of 19 IP NETWORK REGION LSP 1 2 3 4 5 6 NAMES IN PRIORITY ORDER node-10-LSP_____ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ 2 Enter the names of up to six LSPs to be associated with region 1. The LSP names must be the same as administered on the Node Names form. 3 4 Submit the form. Repeat for each network region with which you want to associate LSPs. Administer IP Interfaces This procedure assigns network region 1, as an example, to the S8300 Media Server. Assign the network region to the S8300 1 At the SAT prompt, type change ip-interfaces procr. The S8300 displays the IP Interfaces screen for the media server. IP Interfaces Screen change ip-interfaces procr Page 1 of 1 IP INTERFACES Type: PROCR Node Name: procr IP Address: 135.9.41.146 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Enable Ehternet Port? Nework Region: 1 200 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager 2 The field Eth Port should indicate Y (yes). The Node Name should be the IP address of the S8300 Media Server. Administer the LSP Form If the primary controller has LSPs, you must enter the LSP node names on the LSP form to enable the LSPs to get translations updates from the primary controller. Once the LSPs are successfully entered on the LSP form, their status can be viewed with the display lsp command. NOTE: The LSP node names must be administered on the node-names-ip form before they can be entered on the LSP form. Add LSP names to the LSP form 1 At the S8300 SAT prompt, type change lsp to open the LSP form. LSP Screen change lsp Number NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 node-10-LSP_ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ Page LOCAL SURVIVABLE PROCESSOR IP Address Service State? 192.168.1.50 in-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service 1 of 16 Translations Updated 14:21 5/4/2003 Enter the node name for each LSP supported by the primary controller and submit the form. The Primary Controller is an S8500 or S8700 If the primary controller is an S8500 or S8700. This document covers only the administration of Communication Manager required for the G700 Media Gateway to communicate with the primary controller over a customer’s network. For the majority of required administration, see ‘‘Administrator’s Guide to Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-506,’’ or ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ In this section, you will use the SAT interface to: • Assign Node Names • Define the IP Network Region • Add a Media Gateway Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 201 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager NOTE: For information on installing the CLAN boards on the S8500 or S8700 port networks and complete information on installing an S8700 Media Server, see the Installation documentation on the ‘‘Avaya S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Server Library CD, 555233-825.’’ Assign Node Names and IP Addresses for the C-LANs and LSPs NOTE: The CLAN boards must be TN799DP running version 5 or greater firmware. Be sure to check the firmware version for these boards on the S8700. For information on how to upgrade the firmware on the S8700, please see the section "Upgrade Firmware in Selected Port Cabinet Packs" in Upgrading the Avaya Media Server Configuration in the S8700 documentation portion of this documentation CD, ‘‘Avaya S8300, S8500, and S8700 Media Server Library CD, 555-233-325.’’ Assign node names and IP addresses 1 At the SAT prompt, type change node-names ip to open the Node Names screen. Example Node Names Screen change node-names ip Page 1 of 1 IP NODE NAMES Name default_________ node-1-clan __ node-2-clan node-10-lsp node-11-lsp __________ __________ __________ 2 3 IP Address 0__.0__.0__.0__ 192.168.1 _.124 192.168.1 _.97_ 192.168.1 _.50_ 192.168.1 _.51_ ___.___.___. _ ___.___.___. _ ___.___.___. _ Name _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ IP Address ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ ___.___.___.___ Enter the name and IP address for the C-LANs and LSPs. Press F 3 (E NT ER ) when complete. Administer Network Regions Before assigning an IP network region to a G700, you must define network region on the IP Network Region form. After a network region is defined, you can assign it to the various network elements (servers, gateways, IP phones). The information you need to do this should be provided in your planning documentation. Use the system defaults if the planning documentation does not specify otherwise. For a G700 with an S8300 LSP and an S8500 or S8700 as the primary controller, there may be more than one network region, since there can be up to 250 G700 Media Gateways connected to the S8500 or S8700 with thousands of telephones in the network. In this case, you define a network region for each CLAN board on the S8500 or S8700 port networks, though they may also have the same network region. The G700, in this case, may also share the same network region as the CLAN board(s). However, it may have a different network region because of the geographic distances of the connections between the G700 202 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager and the S8500 or S8700. The G700 network region may also differ because of the nature of the endpoints connected to it. Define IP network regions for the G700 and CLAN board(s) CAUTION: Defining IP network regions can be quite complex. For detailed information on the use and administration of IP network regions, see ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ 1 On the SAT screen of the primary controller for the G700 Media Gateway, type change ipnetwork-region , where the is the region you will assign to the G700 Media Gateway. This region number may or may not match the network region of the S8500 or S8700 CLAN boards. The system displays the IP Network Region screen. IP Network Region Screen change ip-network-region 1 Page 1 of 19 IP NETWORK REGION Region: 1 Location: Name: Home Domain: AUDIO PARAMETERS Codec Set: 1 UDP Port Min: 2048 UDP Port Max: 3028 DiffServ/TOS PARAMETERS Call Control PHB Value: 34 Audio PHB Value: 46 802.1P/Q PARAMETERS Call Control 802.1p Priority: 7 Audio 802.1p Priority: 6 H.323 IP ENDPOINTS H.323 Link Bounce Recovery? y Idle Traffic Interval (sec): 20 Keep-Alive Interval (sec): 5 Keep-Alive Count: 5 2 Intra-region IP-IP Direct Audio: yes Inter-region IP-IP Direct Audio: yes IP Audio Hairpinning? y RTCP Reporting Enabled? n RTCP MONITOR SERVER PARAMETERS Use Default Server Parameters? y AUDIO RESOURCE RESERVATION PARAMETERS RSVP Enabled? n Complete the fields as described in ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ NOTE: It is strongly recommended to use the defaults in the screen. 3 If the network region of the G700 (1 in this example) is different from that of the S8500 or S8700 CLAN board(s), you must interconnect the two regions. Press NextPage twice to display page 3, Inter Network Region Connection Management. The system displays page 3 of the IP Network Region screen. This screen shows the source region (1) and the first 15 destination network region numbers. (Pages 4–19 show destination regions 16–250). Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 203 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager IP Network Region Screen, Page 3 display ip-network-region 1 Page Inter Network Region Connection Management src rgn 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 dst rgn 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 codec-set 1 direct-WAN WAN-BW-limints 3 of 19 Intervening-regions 3 Type the number for the type of codec set (1–7) that the S8500 or S8700 will use to interconnect the G700 and the C-LAN board(s) in the row corresponding to the region of the C-LAN. In this example, the C-LAN is in region 9 and codec-set type 3 is to be used for the interconnection between region 1 and region 9. (In this example, codec type 1 is used for communication within region 1) The SAT command, list ip-codec-set, lists the types of codecs available on this server. For more detail about the Inter Network Region Connection Management form, see ‘‘Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504.’’ 5 Press F 3 (E NT ER ) when complete. Assign LSPs to the Network Regions If the primary controller has LSPs, you can assign the LSPs to network regions. In the event of a network failure, IP telephones assigned to a network region will register with the LSPs assigned to that region. This procedure assigns up to six LSPs to a network region. Assign LSPs to a network region 1 On the IP Network Region screen, go to page 3. IP Network Region Screen, page 3 change ip-network-region 1 Page 2 of 19 IP Network Region LSP 1 2 3 4 5 6 204 NAMES IN PRIORITY ORDER node-10-LSP______ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ ________________ Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager 2 Enter the names of up to six LSPs to be assigned to region 1. The LSP names must be the same as administered on the Node Names form. 3 4 Submit the form. Repeat for each network region to which you want to assign LSPs. Administer IP Interfaces Define the IP interfaces of the S8500 or S8700 port network CLAN boards NOTE: This should have already been established as a part of normal S8500 or S8700 installation. 1 Type change ip-interfaces to open the IP Interfaces screen. IP Interfaces Screen change ip-interfaces procr Page 1 of 1 IP INTERFACES Type: Slot: Code/Suffix: Node Name: IP Address: Subnet Mask: Gateway Address: Enable Ehternet Port? Nework Region: VLAN: C-LAN 01A03 TN799 d procr 135.9.41.146 255.255.255.0 135.9.41.254 y 1 0 Number of CLAN Sockets Before Warning: 400 2 Complete the fields as described the in the following table. Field Conditions/Comments Type Either C-LAN. Slot The slot location for the circuit pack. Code/Suffix Display only. This field is automatically populated with TN799 for CLAN. Node name The unique node name for the IP interface. The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen. IP Address The IP address (on the customer LAN) of the C-LAN. Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface. For more information on IP addresses and subnetting, see “Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504”. Gateway Address The address of a network node that serves as the default gateway for the IP interface. 1 of 2 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 205 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager Field Conditions/Comments Enable Ethernet Port? The Ethernet port must be enabled (y) before it can be used. The port must be disabled (n) before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen. Network Region The region number for this IP interface. VLAN The VLAN number assigned to the C-LAN, if any. Number of CLAN Sockets Before Warning The threshold for the number of sockets used by this C-LAN that triggers a warning message to be sent to the error log. 2 of 2 3 Close the screen. Administer the LSP Form If the primary server has LSPs, you must enter the LSP node names on the LSP form to enable the LSPs to get translations updates from the primary controller. Once the LSPs are successfully entered on the LSP form, their status can be viewed with the display lsp command. NOTE: The LSP node names must be administered on the node-names-ip form before they can be entered on the LSP form. Add LSP names to the LSP form 1 At the SAT prompt, type change lsp to open the LSP form. LSP Screen change lsp Number NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 node-10-LSP_ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ Page LOCAL SURVIVABLE PROCESSOR IP Address Service State? 192.168.1.50 in-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service out-of-service 1 of 16 Translations Updated 14:21 5/4/2003 Enter the node name for each LSP supported by the primary controller and submit the form. To perform the procedures in this section, telnet to the primary controller, log in, and open a SAT session. 206 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager CAUTION: Before administering a media gateway, make sure that the gateway has been fully configured. Add Media Gateway 1 At the SAT prompt, type add media-gateway where is the gateway number from 1 to n . (n is 50 for an S8300 and 250 for an S8500 or S8700). The S8300 displays the Media Gateway screen. Add Media Gateway Screen change media-gateway 1 Page 1 of 1 MEDIA GATEWAY Number: Type: Name: Serial No: Network Region: Registered? Slot V1: V2: V3: V4: 1 g700 Swainsons 012X06230551 1 n Module Type IP Address: FW Version/HW Vintage: MAC Address: Encrypt Link? Location: Controller IP Address: Site Data: Name 135.9.41.150 21.13.0 /0 y 1 V8: V9: 2 3 Complete the Name field with the hostname assigned to the G700 Media Gateway. Complete the Identifier field with the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway. You can obtain the serial number by typing the show system command at the MGP command line. CAUTION: Be sure the serial number for the G700 Media Gateway you enter in this procedure matches exactly the serial number displayed in the show system command. The serial number is casesensitive, and if entered incorrectly, will prevent the S8300 Media Server from communicating with the G700 Media Gateway. 4 5 Complete the Network Region field with the value supplied in the planning documentation. If specifically requested by the customer or your planning documents, type gatewayannouncements in the V9 field. This field allows you to enable announcements on the G700 Media Gateway. V9 is a virtual slot. There is no announcement board associated with it. The announcements for the G700 are available in the G700 firmware and are administered in the same way as announcements on the TN2301 circuit pack used on S8500 or S8700 port networks. If there are multiple G700 Media Gateways sharing announcements, then enable announcements on the G700 whose trunks will receive the announcements most often. 6 Press F3 (E NT ER ) to save your changes. If properly administered, the G700 should register with the primary controller within 1–2 minutes. The IP Address, MAC Address, and Module Type fields are populated automatically after the G700 Media Gateway registers with the server. 7 Type change media-gateway to view the Media Gateway form. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 207 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Administer Communication Manager Media Gateway Screen (After Registration with Primary Controller) change media-gateway 1 Page 1 of 1 MEDIA GATEWAY Number: Type: Name: Serial No: Network Region: Registered? Slot V1: V2: V3: V4: 1 g700 Swainsons 012X06230551 1 y Module Type S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 IP Address: 135.9.41.150 FW Version/HW Vintage: 21.13.0 /0 MAC Address: 00:04:0d:02:06:ca Encrypt Link? y Location: 1 Controller IP Address: 135.9.41.146 Site Data: Name ICC MM DCP MM ANA MM T1/E1 MM V8: V9: The media modules installed in the G700 are listed next to their slot numbers. To verify that a G700 Media Gateway has been successfully added: Verify Changes 1 At the SAT prompt, type list media-gateway. List Media-Gateway Screen list media-gateway MEDIA-GATEWAY REPORT Number 2 Name 1 LabA 2 Data MG2 Serial No/ FW Ver/HW Vint 01DR07128730 21 .13 .0 /0 02DR01130356 11 .2 .0 /0 IP Address/ Cntrl IP Addr 135.177.49.57 135.177.49.59 135.177.49.90 135.177.49.40 Type NetRgn Reg? g700 1 y g350 1 n Verify that the G700 Media Gateway has registered. The y in the registered field signifies that the G700 Media Gateway has registered. If the G700 should become unregistered, the y will become an n, but the IP address will remain assigned to the G700 Media Gateway. If the G700 has never been registered, the IP Address field will be blank. If the G700 fails to register, two common causes might be: — The serial number added as the identifier for the G700 is wrong. To check, log back into the G700 gateway and type show system. Check the serial number that appears. — There is no IP connection between the G700 and the S8300. To check, type show mgc and then ping mgp . 208 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Complete the Installation Process Enable Announcements, If Necessary 1 Only if specifically requested by the customer or your planning documents, at the SAT prompt, type enable announcement-board V9, where is the number of the G700 Media Gateway you just added and V9 is the virtual slot (for example, 2V9 means Media Gateway number 2, slot V9. 2 Press E NT ER to enable announcements. The system displays the message Command successfully completed. Save Communication Manager Translations Save translations again after all Communication Manager administration is complete. — At the SAT prompt, type save translation. Complete the Installation Process Consult the planning documentation to obtain the necessary information to complete the installation. Part of the final process will be to: • • • • Connect and administer test endpoints. Test the endpoints. Complete the electrical installation Enable adjunct systems This completes the upgrade procedures. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 209 4 4 Installing a New G700 without an S8300 Complete the Installation Process 210 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 This chapter covers the procedures to upgrade the software on an installed Avaya S8300 Media Server from release 1.x to 2.0. It also covers the procedures to upgrade the firmware on an installed Avaya G700 Media Gateway. The S8300 can be configured as either the primary controller or as a local survivable processor (LSP). When the S8300 is an LSP, the primary controller running Avaya Communication Manager can be either another S8300 or an Avaya S8500 or S8700 Media Server. The steps to upgrade an S8300 configured as an LSP are the same as the steps to upgrade an S8300 configured as the primary controller, with the following additional considerations: • The version of Communication Manager running on the LSP must be the same as, or later than, the version running on the primary controller. • If upgrading both the primary controller and the LSP, the LSP must be upgraded first. Then, with Communication Manager turned off on the LSP, the primary controller is upgraded. Upgrading Communication Manager from a pre-2.0 release to Release 2.0 requires upgrading the operating system to a newer version of Red Hat Linux. The upgrade process includes remastering (reformatting) the hard drive and loading the new software and operating system from a CD-ROM containing the new operating system and Release 2.0 of Communication Manager. CAUTION: This upgrade procedure, including remastering the hard drive on the S8300, requires a service interruption of approximately 4 hours, or up to 6 hours if IA770 is being used. NOTE: This upgrade procedure requires the use of an external USB CD-ROM drive. Tip: Due to the necessary reformatting of the S8300 hard drive for the new operating system, the Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) cannot support upgrades of Communication Manager from a pre-2.0 release to a 2.0(+) release. However, the IW and the Upgrade Tool can still be used for the media gateway and media module firmware upgrades. System Access To access the S8300 on-site, you will normally connect the technician’s laptop directly to the Services port on the S8300 using a crossover cable. See Connection and Login Methods on page 45 for instructions on accessing the S8300 and G700. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 211 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Task Summary Task Summary Before Going to the Site • • • • • • • • • Get USB CD-ROM Drive on page 214 If Upgrading from Release 1.1, Fill in the EPW on page 214 Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager on page 214 Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary on page 214 Check Number of Allocated Ports on page 215 Check FTP Server for Backing up Data on page 215 Get Software/Firmware Files on page 215 Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary on page 216 Complete the RFA Process (Obtain license and password file) on page 217 On-site Preparation Tasks • • • • • • • Check Current Software Release on page 220 Pre-Upgrade Tasks — If the S8300 is the Primary Controller on page 221 Get IA770 (AUDIX) Data and Stop IA770 (if IA770 is being used) on page 224 Back up recovery system files on page 224 Record Configuration Information on page 226 Install the Pre-Upgrade Software Update (patch) on page 227 Back Up the System Files (Linux Migration Web Procedure) on page 229 S8300 Upgrade Tasks • • • • • • • • • • • • 212 Copy Remastering Program (RP) file to the S8300 hard drive on page 232 Install the RP software on page 232 Set Telnet Parameters on page 233 Remaster Hard Drive and Install the Upgrade Software on page 233 Verify Software Version on page 236 Copy Files to the S8300 on page 236 Configure the Network Parameters on page 238 If Upgrading from a Pre-1.2 Release on page 239 Verify Connectivity on page 240 Restore the Linux Migration Backup File on page 240 If IA770 Is Being Used, Ensure that Messaging Is Disabled on page 243 Verify the Time, Date, and Time Zone on page 243 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Task Summary • • • • • • Install Post-Upgrade Communication Manager Update File from Your Laptop, if any on page 244 Verify Media Server Configuration on page 245 Install the New License File on page 246 Install the New Authentication File on page 247 Save Translations on page 247 Verify Operation on page 249 G700 Upgrade Using the Wizards • Using the Installation Wizard on page 250 • Using the Upgrade Tool on page 250 G700 Manual Upgrade Tasks G700 Pre-upgrade Tasks • Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory on page 250 • Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 on page 251 G700 Upgrade Tasks • • • • Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor on page 252 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor on page 253 Install New Firmware on the Media Modules on page 254 Install New Firmware on Other G700 Media Gateways on page 256 Post-Upgrade Tasks • • • • • • • • • • • Install and Restart IA770 on page 257 Save Translations on page 259 Install IA770 update (patch) files, if any on page 259 Check Media Modules on page 260 Enable Scheduled Maintenance on page 260 Busy Out Trunks on page 260 Check for Translation Corruption on page 260 Resolve Alarms on page 260 Re-enable Alarm Origination on page 261 Back up the System on page 261 Restart LSPs (if any) on page 261 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 213 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Before Going to the Customer Site Before Going to the Customer Site The procedures in this section should be completed before going to the customer site or before starting a remote installation. Get USB CD-ROM Drive Upgrading Communication Manager on an S8300 from release 1.x to release 2.0 requires an external USB CD-ROM Drive. Be sure that you have the drive before going to the customer site. Collect Upgrade Information If Upgrading from Release 1.1, Fill in the EPW If you upgrading from release 1.1, you will need to do a complete configuration of the S8300 after the upgrade to release 2.0. The most efficient way to do this is to fill in the Electronic Pre-installation Worksheet (EPW) and use the Avaya Installation Wizard to complete the server configuration task. You should download the latest version of the EPW from http://support.avaya.com/avayaiw/ to your laptop. You can fill in most or all of the configuration information before going to the site. Any missing information can be added to the EPW at the site by viewing the configuration screens using the Maintenance Web Interface before the upgrade. Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager The project manager should provide you with forms that contain all the information needed to prepare for this installation. The information primarily consists of IP addresses, subnet mask addresses, logins, passwords, people to contact, the type of system, and equipment you need to install. Verify that the information provided by the project manager includes all the information requested in your planning forms. Tip: Appendix B, “Information Checklists” provides several checklists to help you gather the installation and upgrade information. Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary For an upgrade of an existing G700, the existing license file can usually be reused. However, if the customer is adding feature functionality (for example, adding BRI trunks), or if the upgrade is between major releases (for example, 1.3 to 2.0), you will need the serial number of the G700. To get this number, ask the customer’s administrator to log in to the S8300 web page and select View License Status from the main menu to display the serial number. 214 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Before Going to the Customer Site For a new installation, you need the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway in order to complete the creation of the customer’s license file on the rfa.avaya.com web site. To get this number, look for the serial number sticker on the back of the G700 chassis. If the unit is delivered directly to the customer and you will not have phone or LAN line access from the customer site to access the rfa.avaya.com web site, this task will require a preliminary trip to the customer site. Check Number of Allocated Ports Release 2.0 of Communication Manager supports a maximum of 900 ports if the S8300 is a primary controller. If the existing system has more than 900 ports allocated, then there may be a problem with the upgrade and you need to escalate. Ask the customer to check the system for the maximum number of ports. This can be done via the SAT command, display system-parameters customer options. Verify that the Maximum Ports: field is 900 or less. Check FTP Server for Backing up Data During the installation and upgrade procedures, you will need to back up the system data to an FTP server. Normally, you will use an FTP server on the customer’s LAN for backups. To do this, you will need information on how to get to the backup location — login ID and password, and the IP address and directory path on the FTP server. Check with your project manager or the customer for this information. CAUTION: Before going to the customer site, make sure that you can use a customer server for backups. Get Software/Firmware Files The file containing the software for the S8300 has a *.tar extension and contains both the S8300 software and the G700 firmware. The *.tar file is on a CD-ROM that you take to the site. Additional files that may be needed are license and authentication files and the most recent versions of the software update (patch) files and G700 firmware files. :The process for upgrading to Release 2.0 of Communication Manager varies slightly, depending on the release you are upgrading from. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 215 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Before Going to the Customer Site Table 6: Upgrade requirements depending on pre-upgrade release Software Release Before Upgrade to Release 2.0 Release 1.1.x and all other 1.x.x releases not listed below R011x.01.xxx.x Release 1.2.x, 1.3.0. R011x.02.110.4 R011x.03.526.6 Release 1.3.1. R011x.03.1.531.0 R011x.03.1.5xx.x Upgrade Requirement No pre-upgrade update (patch) required. You need to back up only translation files. Once the hard drive is remastered and the new software is installed, you must reconfigure the media server as if it were a new installation using the Avaya Installation Wizard. You must apply a pre-upgrade update (patch) to the system files before backing up all the system files, including translations. Once the hard drive is remastered and the new software is installed, you can restore all the files. No pre-upgrade update (patch) required. Back up all the system files, including translations. Once the hard drive is remastered and the new software is installed, you can restore all the files. To upgrade just the G700 processor and media module firmware, you can obtain the individual firmware image files from the Avaya Support Web site. In this case, you cannot use the S8300 as the TFTP server. Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary Skip to the next section if a software update is not required for this installation or upgrade, or if the software for the required updates are on your software CD. If one or more updates are required for this installation or upgrade procedure, and the update file is not on your software CD, download the update file from the Avaya Support web site to your laptop: 1 2 3 On your laptop, create a directory to store the file (for example, c:\S8300download). Connect to the LAN using a browser on your laptop or the customer’s PC and access http://www.avaya.com/support on the Internet to copy the required Communication Manager update file to the laptop. At the Avaya support site, select the following sequence of links: — Software & Firmware Downloads — G700 Media Gateway & S8300 Media Server — Software Downloads — Avaya Communication Manager Software Updates for MV x.x.x (where x.x.x is the release that is currently running on the S8300) 4 Locate the file name that matches the load listed in your planning documentation. The file name ends with .tar.gz (for example only, 03.0.526.5-5767.tar.gz). 5 6 Double-click the file name. The system displays a File Download window. Click on Save this file to disk. Save the file to an appropriate directory on your laptop. 216 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Before Going to the Customer Site Complete the RFA Process (Obtain license and password file) Every S8300 media server and local survivable processor (LSP) requires a current and correct version of a license file in order to provide the expected call-processing service. The license file specifies the features and services that are available on the S8300 media server, such as the number of ports purchased. The license file contains a software version number, hardware serial number, expiration date, and feature mask. The license file is reinstalled to add or remove call-processing features. New license files may be required when upgrade software is installed. The Avaya authentication file contains the logins and passwords to access the S8300 media server. This file is updated regularly by Avaya services personnel, if the customer has a maintenance contract. All access to Communication Manager from any login is blocked unless a valid authentication file is present on the S8300 media server. A new license file and the Avaya authentication file may be installed independently of each other or any other server upgrades. NOTE: For an upgrade, you do not normally need to install a new authentication file (with a .pwd extension). However, if one is required, follow the same steps as with a license file. License File and Communication Manager Versions for a Local Survivable Processor The license file of the S8300 as an LSP must have a feature set that is equal to or greater than that of the media server that acts as primary controller (an S8300 or S8700). This is necessary so that if control passes to the LSP, it can allow the same level of call processing as that of the primary controller. Additionally, the LSP must have a version of Communication Manager that is identical to that of the primary controller. The license file requirements of the LSP should be identified in your planning documentation. Complete and Download the License File to Your Laptop 1 Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to create a directory on your laptop for storing license and authentication files (for example, C:\licenses). 2 3 Access the Internet from your laptop and go to rfa.avaya.com. 4 Check that the license and authentication files are complete. You might need to add the serial number of the customer’s G700. 5 6 If the files are not complete, complete them. Use the System ID or the SAP ID of the customer to locate the license and authentication files for the customer. Use the download or E-mail capabilities of the RFA web site to download the license and authentication files to your laptop. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 217 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Before Going to the Customer Site Run the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the INADS IP Address, if Necessary This step is normally not necessary for an upgrade of an existing system. NOTE: ART is available only to Avaya associates. Business Partners call 800-295-0099. The ART tool is a software tool that generates an IP address for a customer’s INADS alarming modem. This IP address is required for configuring the S8300’s modem for alarming. NOTE: You must generate a license and authentication file before you use the ART tool. Also, the ART process is available only to Avaya personnel. You need an ART login ID and password, which you can set up at the ART web site. Non-Avaya personnel must contact their service support or customer care center for INADS addresses, if required. 1 2 Access the ART web site on your laptop at http://art.dr.avaya.com. Select Administer S8x00 Server products for installation script, log in, enter the customer information, select Installation Script, and click Start Installation script & IP Addr Admin. A script file is created and downloaded or emailed to you. 3 You can use the installation script to automatically set up an IP address and other alarming parameters. Obtain the Static Craft Password After installing new software and new Authentication file, you will need to use a static craft password to access the customer’s system. This static password will enable you to log in to the S8300 with a direct connection to the Services port without the ASG challenge/response. To obtain the static password, call the ASG Conversant number, 800-248-1234 or 720-444-5557 (or 877-295-0099 for Avaya Business Partners), and follow the prompts to get the password. In addition to your credentials, you will need to enter the customer’s Product ID or the FL or IL number. 218 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 On-site Preparation for the Upgrade On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Perform the tasks in this section before starting the software upgrade on the S8300. Access to the S8300 To perform the installation and upgrade procedures you will need to connect your laptop to the S8300 Services port using a crossover cable. You will use both Telnet and the Maintenance Web Interface to perform the procedures. For a direct connection to the S8300 Services port, your laptop must be properly configured. See Laptop Configuration for a Direct Connection to the Services Port on page 47. Access the S8300 via Telnet 1 2 3 Click Start > Run to open the Run dialog box. Type telnet 192.11.13.6 and press Enter. Log in as craft or dadmin. Accept the defaults for Suppress Alarm Origination (y) and Terminal Type (vt100). At this point, you will get the bash prompt and will be able to enter CLI commands. Access the S8300 via the Maintenance Web interface 1 2 3 4 Launch the Web browser. Type 192.11.13.6 in the Address field to open the logon page. Log on as craft or dadmin when prompted. Click Launch Maintenance Web Interface to get to the Main Menu. Access SAT 1 From the bash CLI, type SAT and press Enter. Or, to open SAT directly from your laptop, click Start > Run and type telnet 192.11.13.6 5023 and press Enter. 2 3 4 Log in as craft or dadmin. Enter w2ktt for the Terminal Type (if you are running Windows 2000 on your laptop). Accept the default (y) for Suppress Alarm Origination. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 219 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Check Current Software Release Tip: The Upgrade Tool performs this task automatically. Check the release of Communication Manager currently running on the S8300 to determine whether a pre-upgrade update is required. If the current release is 2.0.0 or later, go to Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x. 1 2 Log in to the Web interface on the S8300 and launch the Maintenance Web Interface. Choose View Software Version under Server Configuration and Upgrades. The system displays the Software Version screen. Software Version Screen 3 220 Check the Reports as: field for the release number of the S8300 software. In this example, the release number is reported as R011x.02.0.524.0. This corresponds to release 1.2.0. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 On-site Preparation for the Upgrade The following table maps the release number to the Reports as: field and specifies whether or not a pre-upgrade update is required. Software Release Numbers Release Number Reported as Release Number Pre-upgrade update Required? From: R011x.01.0.xxx To: R011x.01.9.xxx 1.1.0 to 1.1.9 No From: R011x.02.0.xxx To: R011x.03.0.xxx 1.2.0 to 1.3.0 Yes From: R011x.03.1.xxx To: R011x.03.9.xxx 1.3.1 to 1.3.9 No From: R012x.00.0.xxx To: R012x.00.9.xxx 2.0.0 to 2.0.9 No Pre-Upgrade Tasks — If the S8300 is the Primary Controller Skip to Upgrade the S8300 on page 227, if the S8300 is configured as an LSP. CAUTION: If you are upgrading an S8300 primary controller that has LSPs registered to it, the LSPs must be upgraded before the primary controller. (You can use the SAT command, list media-gateway, to see if there are LSPs registered to the S8300.) Perform the following procedures if you are upgrading an S8300 that is configured as a primary controller. NOTE: It is no longer necessary to disable Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) before an upgrade or to enable it after an upgrade. Clear Alarms 1 On the Maintenance Web Interface under Alarms and Notification (Alarms for R2.0), click View Current Alarms (Current Alarms for R2.0). 2 3 4 If no alarms are listed, skip the next two steps. If alarms are listed, click Clear All. Resolve any remaining major alarms through the Communication Manager SAT. Check Link Status 1 Open a SAT session. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 221 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 On-site Preparation for the Upgrade 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enter display communication-interface links. Note all administered links. Enter status link number for each administered link. Enter list signaling group. Note the signaling groups listed by number. For each of the signaling groups listed, enter status signaling group number. Make a note of any links that are down. Record All Busyouts 1 2 At the SAT prompt, type display errors and press Enter. Look for type 18 errors and record any trunks that are busied out — you will return them to their busy-out state after the upgrade. Disable Scheduled Maintenance To prevent scheduled daily maintenance from interfering with the upgrade: 1 2 At the SAT prompt, type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. If scheduled maintenance is in progress, set the Stop Time field to 1 minute after the current time. or If scheduled maintenance is not in progress, set the Start Time field to a time after the upgrade will be completed. For example, if you start the upgrade at 8:00 P.M. and the upgrade takes 90 minutes, set the Start Time field to 21:30. Check for Translation Corruption 1 2 At the SAT prompt, type newterm and press Enter. Enter your terminal type and press Enter. If you see the following message: Warning: Translation corruption found, then follow the normal escalation procedure for translation corruption before continuing the upgrade. Stop the LSPs (if applicable) Skip this procedure if no LSPs are registered to the S8300. For configurations with LSPs, the LSPs and the primary controller (S8300, S8500, or S8700) must run the same version Communication Manager. Therefore, an upgrade to an LSP is usually accompanied by an upgrade of the primary controller. You should upgrade the LSP before you upgrade the primary controller. Before you upgrade the primary controller, you need to shut down Communication Manager on the LSPs. This prevents the phones and other endpoints attached to the G700 from trying to register with the LSPs while you are upgrading the primary controller. 222 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 On-site Preparation for the Upgrade To stop Communication Manager on an LSP: 1 2 3 Open a telnet session on the S8300 (LSP). Telnet to the LSP. At the command line, type stop -acfn and press Enter. The S8300 (LSP) shuts down Communication Manager. CAUTION: The LSP’s Communication Manager must remain shutdown while you upgrade the primary Controller. When you complete the primary controller upgrade, run save translation on the primary controller before restarting Communication Manager on the LSP. The save translations process will automatically cause the G700’s endpoints to reregister with the primary controller. After the primary controller has been upgraded, you need to restart the LSPs. Disable Alarm Origination If alarm origination is enabled during the upgrade, unnecessary alarms will be sent to the Operations Support System (OSS) destination number(s). Even if you selected "Suppress Alarm Origination" when you logged in, alarm origination will be automatically re-enabled when the system reboots after the software upgrade. Use this procedure to prevent alarm origination from being re-enabled after reboot. CAUTION: If you do not disable Alarm Origination, the system can generate alarms during the upgrade, resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets. To prevent alarm outcalling: 1 2 Logoff the SAT session At the command prompt, type almenable -d n -s n, where -d n sets the dialout option to neither (number) -s n disables SNMP alarm origination NOTE: Be sure to reset alarm origination after the upgrade. 3 Type almenable (without any options) to verify the alarm origination status. You should see: incoming: enable Dial Out Alarm Origination: neither SNMP Alarm Origination: N Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 223 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Get IA770 (AUDIX) Data and Stop IA770 (if IA770 is being used) Skip to Back up recovery system files on page 224 if IA770 is not being used. If IA770 is being used, you need to collect some data, leave a test message, and shut down IA770 before backing up the files. 1 To test IA770 after the migration, write down the number of a test voice mailbox, or create one if none exists. Also write down the number of the IA770 hunt group. 2 3 4 5 6 Leave a message on the test mailbox that will be retrieved after the migration. Click Start > Run to open the Run dialog box. Type telnet 192.11.13.6 and press Enter. Log in as craft or dadmin. Type stop -s Audix and press Enter to shut down AUDIX. The shutdown will take a few minutes. 7 Type watch /VM/bin/ss and press Enter to monitor the shutdown. When the shutdown is complete, you will see only the voicemail and audit processes. For example: voicemail:(10) audit http:(9) Press Ctrl+C to break out of the watch command. 8 Type /vs/bin/util/vs_status and press Enter to verify that AUDIX is shut down. When AUDIX is shut down, you will see "voice system is down." NOTE: After the S8300 upgrade, you must upgrade the G700 and media module firmware before restarting IA770. Back up recovery system files CAUTION: If the current release is 1.1.x, you must backup the Communication Manager translations (and AUDIX data if IA770 is installed) using this procedure. Before installing the S8300 upgrade software, you should back up the system data in case there’s a need to back out of the upgrade. To do this, you need an FTP address, directory path, and a user ID and password to access an FTP server on the customer’s network. Check with your project manager or the customer for this information. Back up data 1 224 Under Data Backup/Restore, click Backup Now. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Tip: Depending on the Communication Manager software version, the following screen may look slightly different. 2 Select all data sets: • • • • 3 Avaya Call Processing (ACP) Translations Save ACP translations prior (do not save ACP translations if this is an LSP). Server and System Files Security Files If the AUDIX options are available, select AUDIX and select AUDIX Translations, Names, and Messages. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 225 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 On-site Preparation for the Upgrade 4 Select the FTP backup method and fill in the User Name, Password, Host Name, and Directory fields with information provided by the customer. 5 Click Start Backup to back up the files. If the AUDIX options are available, repeat Steps 3–5 for AUDIX Announcements. The announcements cannot be restored to the 2.0 system but they should be backed up in case it is necessary to revert to the 1.x system. Record Configuration Information If you have not already done so, you must record the current server configuration data, which will be reentered after the upgrade. If you are upgrading from release 1.2 or later, most of the configuration data will be re-entered automatically with the Linux Migration Restore process. However, if you are upgrading from a pre-1.2 release, you will need to re-enter all of the server configuration data. To view the current configuration data: 1 2 3 4 Launch the Maintenance Web Interface. 5 View and record the configuration information on each screen and click Continue to move to the next screen. Under Server Configuration and Upgrades, click Configure Server. Click Continue on the first and second screen. On the "Select method for configuring server" screen, select "Configure all services using the wizard" and click Continue. The best way to record the configuration data is to fill in the Electronic Pre-installation Worksheet (EPW). You then have the option to use the Installation Wizard to do the server configuration task. If you do not have the EPW, you can record the current configuration data and enter it manually after the upgrade. If Upgrading from 1.2 or Later Record the data on the Configure Interface screen. That is, server IP address, gateway IP address, and subnet mask. You can skip the remaining configuration screens. If Upgrading from Pre-1.2 Release Record the data from all configuration screens except the Static Network Routes screen. (Static routes are not used in release 2.0) 226 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Upgrade the S8300 This section describes the procedures for upgrading the S8300 Media Server from a pre-2.0 release of Communication manager to release 2.0. Upgrading S8300 from a pre-2.0 release to release 2.0 requires an upgrade to the Linux operating system. This is accomplished by running a special software application (included on the 2.0 software CD), which reformats the S8300 hard drive, installs the new operating system, and installs Release 2.0 of Communication Manager. These procedures are described in this section. CAUTION: This upgrade procedure, including remastering the hard drive on the S8300, requires a service interruption of approximately 4 hours, or up to 6 hours if IA770 is being used. Tip: Due to the necessary reformatting of the S8300 hard drive for the new operating system, the Avaya Installation Wizard (IW) cannot support upgrades of Communication Manager from a pre-2.0 release to a 2.0(+) release. However, the IW can still be used for the media gateway and media module firmware upgrades. Install the Pre-Upgrade Software Update (patch) If the current software release is between 1.1.0 and 1.1.9, skip this update installation procedure and go to Upgrade the S8300 on page 232. If the current software release is 1.3.1, skip this update installation procedure and go to Back Up the System Files (Linux Migration Web Procedure) on page 229. If the current software release is between 1.2.0 and 1.3.0, you must install the pre-upgrade software update (patch) before backing up the system files. Update procedure NOTE: Typically, any existing updates (patches) should be removed before installing a new update. However, removing existing updates is not necessary for this procedure. Copy pre-upgrade update file to the media server 1 2 Make sure the software CD is in the CD-ROM drive of your laptop. On the Maintenance Web Interface, under Miscellaneous click Upload Files to Server (via browser). 3 4 Browse to the directory on the software CD (or laptop) that contains the pre-upgrade update file. Select the pre-upgrade update file and click Load File. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 227 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Install the pre-upgrade update (patch) 1 Use Telnet to access the media server. a Click Start > Run to open the Run dialog box. b Type telnet 192.11.13.6 and press Enter. c Log in as craft. 2 3 Type cd /var/home/ftp and press Enter to access the ftp directory. At the prompt, type ls -ltr and press Enter to list files in the ftp directory. The S8300 displays a list of files in the ftp directory. 4 5 Verify that the directory contains the *.tar.gz file you have uploaded. Type sudo patch_install patch.tar.gz, where patch is the release or issue number of the update file. (For example, 03.0.526.5-1003.tar.gz). Press Enter. 6 Type patch_show again and press Enter to list Communication Manager files to verify the new software file was installed. 7 Type sudo patch_apply patch, where patch is the release or issue number of the update file. (For example, 03.0.526.5-1003. Do not use the *.tar.gz extension at the end of the file name). Press Enter. The media server goes through a software reset system 4. You must wait until the restart/reset has completed before entering additional commands. The reset should take 1–2 minutes (or longer if messaging is enabled). 8 Type patch_show again and press Enter to list Communication Manager files to verify the new software file was applied. 9 Before proceeding, type statapp -c to view the status of the processes. Make sure everything except dupmgr shows UP. Communication Manger should show 65/65 UP or, if IA770 is installed, 67/67 UP. To stop the continual refresh of the statapp command, type Ctrl-C. NOTE: The number of processes (65/65) may vary depending on the configuration. For a normal state, the second number should not be greater than the first number. For example, the numbers 64/65 UP would indicate that a process did not come up and should be investigated before proceeding. 10 228 Close the browser. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Back Up the System Files (Linux Migration Web Procedure) If the current software release is between 1.2.0 and 1.3.9, you must back up the system files using the Linux Migration backup procedure. Linux Migration Backup 1 Launch the Maintenance Web Interface. Under Server Configuration click Linux Migration (Backup/Restore). 2 Select "Initiate new backup or restore" and click Submit 3 Under Backup Method, select FTP; fill in the User Name, Password, Host Name (or host IP address) and Directory fields for the back up location. The backup location should be a server on the customer’s LAN. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 229 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Click Submit. . 4 Click Status to see the backup progress. NOTE: The Linux Migration backup status function is not enabled for release 1.3.1. To check the backup status when upgrading from 1.3.1, select Backup Status under Data Backup/Restore on the Maintenance Web Interface menu. Then select the backup set and click Check Status. 230 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 5 Select the backup set and click Check Status to see the backup results. If the backup is in progress, click on Refresh until the "Backup is finished" message appears. CAUTION: The screen will show "Backup is finished" when the backup is completed. However, also verify that the message, "Backup Successful" also appears in the last line. If any error messages appear stating that the backup failed, follow the normal escalation procedures. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 231 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Upgrade the S8300 To upgrade the Communications Manager software to Release 2.0, you must remaster the hard drive before installing the software. NOTE: These procedures assume that you have a USB CD-ROM drive connected to one of the USB ports on the S8300. Copy Remastering Program (RP) file to the S8300 hard drive 1 2 3 4 5 Insert the CD containing the software into the CD-ROM drive on the laptop and close the drawer. On the Maintenance Web Interface, under Miscellaneous, click Upload Files to Server. Click Browse to locate the RP file on the CD. The RP file is in the tarfiles directory and is called S8300-00.0-0000.0. Double-click the filename (or highlight the filename and click Open). Click Load File. When the upload is complete, the system displays "File has been successfully uploaded." Install the RP software 1 When the file has been copied, remove the CD from the laptop and insert it into the external CDROM drive connected through the USB port on the media server. NOTE: The next step loads the RP software onto the backup partition. The currently running release remains on the other partition, just as it always does during an upgrade. 2 3 Under Server Configuration and Upgrades click Install New Software Release. 4 On the Choose License Source page, select "I want to reuse the license files from the currently active partition on this server." and "Do not update authentication information." and click Continue. 5 The Click Continue on the next several pages until the RP files are installed. Ignore backup and Tripwire messages. 6 7 When you get to the Reboot Server screen, click Reboot. Select from the menu the upgrade file you just uploaded (i.e., S8300-00.0-0000.0) Click Continue to complete the software installation. Close the Browser. The reboot takes 3–10 minutes. After the system reboots, the RP software redirects the system to boot from the CD-ROM drive. Note that no telephony support is provided by this software. Its only purpose is to reformat the hard drive and install a clean copy of the Avaya Communication Manager server software. NOTE: To monitor the progress of the reboot, you can open a command window on your laptop and enter the ping -t 192.11.13.6 command. When the reboot is finished, the server will start replying to the pings. Type Ctrl+c to stop the pings. 232 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Set Telnet Parameters The Microsoft Telnet application may be set to send a carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF) each time you press Enter. The installation program sees this as 2 key presses. You need to correct this before you Telnet to the server. 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start > Run to open the Run dialog box. Type telnet and press Enter to open a Microsoft Telnet session. Type unset crlf and press Enter. Type display and press Enter to confirm that "Sending only CR" is set. Close the window by clicking on the X in the upper-right corner. This resets your Microsoft Telnet defaults and does not need to be done each time you use Telnet. Remaster Hard Drive and Install the Upgrade Software NOTE: This procedure accesses the information on the CD from the USB CD-ROM drive. 1 Type telnet 192.11.13.6 and press Enter to view the first screen. Tip: To navigate on these screens, use the arrow keys to move to an option, then press the space bar to select the option. Press Enter to submit the screen. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 233 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 2 Select Install, make sure OK is highlighted, and press Enter. 3 Select and press Enter. NOTE: After this step, the previous disk image cannot be recovered by rebooting. 4 Select the appropriate release version (if more than one) then select and press Enter. At this point, the following processes are initiated: • The S8300 hard drive is reformatted • The new Linux operating system is installed 234 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 • Once the drive is properly configured, the program begins installing Communication Manager software and reports the progress. • These processes take 15–20 minutes. When the media server is ready to reboot, the CD drive door opens and the following screen flashes for about 5 seconds. At this point, you are finished with the CD and CD drive. NOTE: In this screen, "latest updates to software" refers to the latest software updates (patches). See Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary on page 216. When the installation process is complete, the system reboots automatically. The reboot takes 1–3 minutes. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 235 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Verify Software Version NOTE: Since the system is now running a new software release, you must login with the initial craft ID and password. (You cannot use dadmin at this point.) 1 2 3 Log on to Integrated Management and launch the Maintenance Web Interface. Under Server, click Software Version. Verify that the media server is running Release 2.0 software. The Report as: string should show R012x at the beginning of the string. For example, R012x.00.0.219.0. Tip: Normally, you would need to use the Make Upgrade Permanent function on the Web Interface at this point. However, this is not necessary for this upgrade because there is no previous software version in the alternate partition. Copy Files to the S8300 During reformatting of the hard drive, a new directory, /var/home/ftp/pub, was created. For release 2.0 and later, this pub directory will be used as the /var/home/ftp directory that was used in previous releases. You must upload the remaining required files to the pub directory on the S8300 hard drive. This includes, but is not limited to, the post-upgrade software update, license file, Avaya authentication file (if needed), and new firmware files. NOTE: Before an upload, be sure the /var/home/ftp/pub directory contains no files with a *.pwd or *.lic extension. Only one of these files can exist in a directory. If more than one exists, move, rename, or delete all but the valid file. 1 Log on to Integrated Management and launch the Maintenance Web Interface. NOTE: Since the system is now running a new software release, you must login with the initial craft ID and password. (You cannot use dadmin at this point.) 236 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 2 Under Miscellaneous click Download Files. 3 Select "Files to download from the machine I’m using to connect to the server" and browse to each file you want to move to the S8300. NOTE: To manually FTP files from your laptop to /var/home/ftp/pub, you must cd to pub after starting ftp and logging in. 4 Click on Download to copy the files to the S8300. The transfer is complete when you see the message, "Files have been successfully uploaded to the server." Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 237 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Configure the Network Parameters If you have upgraded from a pre-1.2 release, skip to If Upgrading from a Pre-1.2 Release on page 239. NOTE: For this procedure, you must have the host name, subnet mask, and IP address of the S8300 and the IP address of the default gateway. Because the software upgrade resets the configuration data, you must reconfigure the network parameters on the S8300 before restoring the backup files. Also, it is possible that the new software added or changed some of the configuration fields or screens. 238 1 2 Under Server Configuration click Configure Server to start the configure server process. 3 4 Select "Configure individual services" and click Continue. Click Continue through the Review Notices to get to the Select Method for Configuring Server page. Click Configure Interfaces from the Steps list. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 5 Fill in the correct server IP address, Gateway, and Subnet mask. (If these fields are already filled in, overwrite them with the correct information if necessary.) Click Change to update the system files. When the configuration change is complete, the screen displays "Successfully configured ethernet interfaces." 6 When the configuration change is complete, click Close Window. At this point, the system resets the IP interfaces. If Upgrading from a Pre-1.2 Release If you have upgraded from a 1.2 or later release, skip to Verify Connectivity on page 240. Restore Translations If upgrading from a pre-1.2 release: 1 2 3 Select View/Restore Data under Data Backup/Restore. Select FTP and enter the information for the FTP backup server. Click View. Select the Communication Manager translations backup set to restore (filename begins with "xln". Click Restore. NOTE: Do not restore the system or security backup sets (filenames beginning with "os" and "security"). If you backed up the AUDIX data, you will need to restore the AUDIX backup set as a separate step. The AUDIX translations, names, and messages backup set filename begins with "audix-tr-name-msg". Do not restore the announcement backup set (filename beginning with "audix-ann"). Configure the Server If you have upgraded from a pre-1.2 release, you must enter all server configuration information. If you have filled in the Electronic Pre-installation Worksheet (EPW), you should use the Avaya Installation Wizard at this point. The Installation Wizard will do the server configuration and install the license and password files. When finished with the Wizard, return to If IA770 Is Being Used, Ensure that Messaging Is Disabled on page 243. Or, you can enter the configuration information manually: 1 2 Select Configure Server on the Maintenance Web Interface menu. Click Continue on the first two screens. When you get to the screen titled "Specify how you want to use this wizard," select "Configure all services using the wizard." Then enter the configuration information on each configuration screen. NOTE: You do not need to enter Static Network Route information. 3 When you complete all the new fields, if necessary, click Continue on the Update System screen. The Update System screen displays each configuration task as it completes. When done, the screen displays the line "All configuration information was entered." 4 Click Close Window. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 239 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 5 6 Log on to a Telnet session. Type /opt/ws/drestart 1 4 to capture the configuration data. You should see the response, "Killed". Skip to If IA770 Is Being Used, Ensure that Messaging Is Disabled on page 243. Verify Connectivity To verify that the Ethernet port is working, ping the FTP server where the Linux-Migration backup file is stored. 1 2 3 On the Maintenance Web Interface, under Diagnostics click Ping. Enter the IP address where the Linux-Migration backup file is stored. Click Execute Ping. If the ping is successful, continue with restoring the system files. Otherwise, check the IP address and connectivity to the server. Restore the Linux Migration Backup File CAUTION: Restore must be run only once. Running restore more than once may corrupt the system data. If a restore appears to have not completed, check Backup History and Backup Logs on the Web Interface, and check the system log in the bash CLI. If all of these sources indicate that a restore has not completed, you can safely rerun the restore. 240 1 On the Maintenance Web Interface, under Server Upgrades click Linux Migration (Backup/Restore). 2 Select "Initiate new backup or restore" and click Submit Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 3 Under Restore Method, select FTP. Fill in the User Name, Password, Host Name (enter host IP Address), and Directory fields for the location of the backup file on the customer’s server. If the you backed up the Linux-Migration backup file to your laptop, use anonymous for User Name, your email address for Password, 192.11.13.5 for Host Name, and \ for Directory. Click Submit. . Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 241 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 4 Select the backup set to restore and both Force options and click Restore. 5 Click Status to view the restore progress 6 Select the backup set and click Check Status to view the restore progress. CAUTION: At this point, you should not use any customer logins. Use only the craft login. 242 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 If IA770 Is Being Used, Ensure that Messaging Is Disabled If the system is using IA770: 1 Click Messaging Software under Miscellaneous. 2 If the Enable button shows at the bottom of the screen, messaging is currently disabled — go to the next step, Verify the Time, Date, and Time Zone on page 243. If the Disable button is showing, messaging in currently enabled so click the Disable button to disable messaging. Verify the Time, Date, and Time Zone 1 Under Server click Server Date/Time. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 243 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Server Date/Time Window 2 Verify or set the media server’s time close enough to the NTS’s time, date, and time zone that synchronization can occur (within about 5 minutes). Install Post-Upgrade Communication Manager Update File from Your Laptop, if any NOTE: Skip this procedure if there is no Communication Manager update file to install. CAUTION: The software update may or may not be call-preserving. Use a telnet session to install the software update. 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start > Run to open the Run dialog box. Type telnet 192.11.13.6 and press Enter. Log in with the initial craft ID and password. (You cannot use dadmin at this point.) Type cd /var/home/ftp/pub and press Enter to access the pub directory. At the prompt, type ls -ltr and press Enter to list files in the pub directory. The media server displays a list of files in the FTP directory. Verify that the directory contains the Communication Manager .tar.gz file you have uploaded, if any. 244 6 Type sudo update_unpack .tar.gz, where is the release or issue number of the latest update file. (For example, 03.0.219.0-4925.tar.gz). Press Enter. 7 Type update_show and press Enter to list Communication Manager files to verify the new software file was installed. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 8 Type sudo update_activate , where is the release or issue number of the latest software file. (For example, 03.0.219.0-4925. Do not use the .tar.gz extension at the end of the file name). Press Enter. The system may initiate a software reset system 4. You must wait until the restart/reset has completed before entering additional commands. If the system displays the message — /opt/ecs/sbin/drestart 1 4 command failed — ignore this message. 9 Type update_show again and press Enter to list Communication Manager files to verify the new software file was applied. Verify Media Server Configuration At this point, you should not have to enter configuration information. In the following procedure, click Continue to open each configuration screen and verify the that configuration information is correct. 1 Under Server Configuration click Configure Server to start the configure server process. Click Continue until you reach the screen titled "Specify how you want to use this wizard." 2 3 Select "Configure all services using the wizard." Click Continue through all the screens, checking for new screens and new fields on existing screens as mentioned in the planning forms. NOTE: You must click Continue through all the screens whether there are changes or not. You do not need to enter Static Network Route information. 4 When you complete all the new fields, if necessary, click Continue on the Update System screen. The Update System screen displays each configuration task as it completes. When done, the screen displays the line "All configuration information was entered." 5 6 7 Click Close Window. Log on to a Telnet session. Type /opt/ws/drestart 1 4 to capture the configuration data. You should see the response, "Killed". Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 245 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Install the New License File CAUTION: Be sure to install the license file before the authentication file. You need to load a new license file when upgrading to a new major release of Communication Manager or when changing the feature set. NOTE: If the S8300 is already set up for remote access, Avaya services personnel can copy new license and authentication files directly into the /pub directory on the server. Avaya personnel will notify you when the new files are in place as agreed (for example, by telephone or E-mail). After they are loaded into the /pub directory, install them using the License File and Authentication File screens under Security on the Maintenance Web Interface. 1 On the Maintenance Web Interface under Security, click License File. 2 Select "Install the license file I previously downloaded," browse to the license file on the services laptop, and click Submit. The system tells you the license is installed successfully. 246 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Install the New Authentication File 1 Click Authentication File 2 Select "Install the Authentication file I previously downloaded" and Click Install. The system tells you the authentication is installed successfully 3 Verify that the restoration of the backup files was successful by testing the craft login. Telnet to 192.11.13.6 and login as craft using the normal craft password. NOTE: You may need to use the static craft password at this point. The static password will enable you to log in to the S8300 with a direct connection to the Services port without the ASG challenge/response. To obtain the static password, call the ASG Conversant number, 800-248-1234 or 720-444-5557 (or 877-295-0099 for Avaya Business Partners), and follow the prompts to get the password. In addition to your credentials, you will need to enter the customer’s Product ID or the FL or IL number. CAUTION: After you install new license and authentication files, be sure to run save translation. This task saves the official passwords for the customer’s system. If you fail to perform this step, you may be irretrievably locked out of the system later in the installation when the system reboots. Save Translations CAUTION: If the system is using IA770, do not save translations at this time. Skip to Verify Operation on page 249. You will save translations after installing the new IA770 software. 1 2 3 In the telnet session, open a SAT session. Log in again as craft. Type save translation and press Enter. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 247 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 When the save is finished, the system displays the message, "Command successfully completed." 248 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the S8300 Verify Operation Using the Maintenance Web Interface: 1 2 Under Server click Process Status. 3 Make sure everything except ENV, arbiter, and dupmgr shows UP. Communication Manger should show 65/65 UP or, if IA770 is installed, 67/67 UP. Select "Summary and Display once" and click View to access the View Process Status Results page. The number of processes (67/67) may vary depending on the configuration. For a normal state, the second number should not be greater than the first number. For example, the numbers 66/67 UP would indicate that a process did not come up and should be investigated before proceeding. 4 Using a telephone, make test calls to verify that call processing is working. Next Steps This completes the S8300 upgrade process for upgrading from a 1.x software release to release 2.0. You now must upgrade the G700 and media module firmware and then install and restart IA770, if installed on the S8300. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 249 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 The tasks in this section can be completed most efficiently by using the Avaya Installation Wizard or the Upgrade Tool. If the S8300 is a primary controller, use the Installation Wizard. If the S8300 is one of several LSPs controlled by the same primary controller, use the Upgrade Tool. Or, in either case, you can complete the tasks manually as described below. Go to http://support.avaya.com/avayaiw to download job aids for using the Installation Wizard or Upgrade Tool. CAUTION: If the passwords to log on to the P300 stack or the MGP have been changed from the defaults, you must change them back to the original default passwords before using the Installation Wizard or Upgrade Tool. Using the Installation Wizard On the Integrated Management main menu, click Launch Avaya Installation Wizard. To use the Installation Wizard to upgrade firmware on the G700, be sure to select the "Upgrade a previously installed Media Server with new software and/or Media Gateway firmware" on the Usage Options screen. The Usage Options screen appears in the Installation Wizard after a few introductory screens. Using the Upgrade Tool On the Integrated Management main menu, click Launch Upgrade Tool. Follow the instruction to upgrade the G700 and media module firmware. Manual Upgrade Procedures If you are using the Avaya Installation Wizard or the Upgrade Tool: • Skip to If the S8300 is Using IA770 on page 257 if IA770 is being used, or • Skip to Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) on page 260 if IA770 is not being used. If you are not using the Avaya Installation Wizard or Upgrade Tool, conduct the following manual procedures to update the firmware running on the G700 Media Gateway processors and media modules. Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory Before proceeding with the G700 firmware installation, you should check the tftpboot directory on the TFTP server to make sure the firmware versions match those listed in the planning documentation. 250 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 Conduct the following procedure to compare software versions running on the G700 processors and media modules with the versions in you planning documents. If the versions do not match, new firmware for those components is necessary. Determine if new firmware for the P330 stack processor is necessary. 1 At either the P330-1(super)# or P330-1(configure)# prompt, type dir. The system displays the list of software. Directory List for P300 Processor M# -1 1 1 1 file ---module-config stack-config EW_Archive Booter_Image ver num ------N/A N/A 3.8.6 3.2.5 file type ---------Running Conf Running Conf SW Web Image SW BootImage file location ------------Ram Ram NV-Ram NV-Ram file description ---------------Module Configuration Stack Configuration WEB Download Booter Image 2 Check the version number (ver num) of the EW_Archive file to see if it matches the Release Letter. If not, you must upgrade the P330 stack processor. 3 Type show image version The system displays the list of software. Show Image Version List for P330 Processor Mod -----3 3 4 Module-Type ----------Avaya G700 Media Gateway Avaya G700 Media Gateway Bank Version ---- ------A 0.0.0 B 3.9.0 Check the version number of the stack software image file in Band B to see if it matches the your planning document. If not, you must upgrade the P330 stack processor. Determine if new firmware is required for the MGP, VoIP Module, and installed media modules. 1 2 Type session mgp At the MG-001-1(super)# prompt, type show mg list_config The system displays the list of software. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 251 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 Show MG List_Config eyp SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------210(B) 00 52 12 54 VOIP FW ------2 N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 Refer to the list to check the FW vintage number of the G700. In the TYPE column, find G700, then check the matching field in the FW VINTAGE column to see if it matches the vintage number in your planning forms. If not, you must install new firmware on the G700 Media Gateway. Also check if the release number in the FW VINTAGE column contains (A) or (B) to designate the software bank. If the list shows B, you will upgrade A. If the list shows A, you will upgrade B. 4 Refer to the VOIP FW column and row for slot V0 (same row occupied by the G700 information) to see if the number matches the VoIP firmware identified in your planning forms. If not, you must also upgrade the G700 Media Gateway motherboard VoIP module. NOTE: The VoIP processor on the motherboard is upgraded using the same firmware image file as the VoIP media modules; for example, the file mm760v8.fdl is vintage #8. 5 Check the FW VINTAGE column for vintages of each of the installed Media Modules: MM710, MM711, MM712, MM720, and/or MM760 to see if they match the FW vintages in the planning forms. If not, you must upgrade them, as well. Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor Install P330 stack processor firmware 1 From your S8300 telnet session, telnet back to the P330 stack processor: Type telnet , where is the IP address of the P330 stack master processor on the customer’s LAN. 1 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type copy tftp SW_image EW_archive where is the full-path name for the image file with format and vintage number similar to viisa3_8_2.exe, is the full-path name for the embedded web application file with format similar to p330Tweb.3.8.6.exe, is the IP address of the TFTP server, and 252 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 is the number, 1 through 10, of the media gateway in the stack. If there is only one G700 Media Gateway, the number is 1. 2 To verify that the download was successful when the prompt returns: — type show image version and check the version number in the Version column for Bank B. — type dir and check the version number in the ver num column for the EW_Archive file. 3 Type reset Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor Install MGP firmware 1 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp to reach the G700 Media Gateway processor. 2 Type configure at the MG-???-1(super)# prompt to enter configuration mode, which will change the prompt to MG-???-1(configure)#. 3 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type show mgp bootimage to determine which disk partition (bank) is in the Active Now column. You will update the bank that is not listed as Active Now. The system displays the following screen: Example: Show mgp bootimage FLASH MEMORY Bank A Bank B IMAGE VERSION 109 210 ACTIVE NOW Bank B ACTIVE AFTER REBOOT Bank B 4 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type copy tftp mgp-image to transfer the mgp image from the tftp server to the G700, where is the bank that is not Active Now (Bank A in the example). is the full path name of the mgp firmware image file, which begins with mgp and will be similar to the name mgp_8_0.bin. is the IP address of the S8300. See the following example: copy tftp mgp-image a mgp_8_0.bin 195.123.49.54. The screen will show the progress. 5 Type set mgp bootimage where is the same letter you entered in the previous step. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 253 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 6 At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type reset mgp. A system prompt asks to confirm the reset. 7 Select Yes at the dialog box that asks if you want to continue. The G700 Media Gateway processor will reset. The LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway and the Media Modules will flash. These elements will each conduct a series of self-tests. When the LEDs on the Media Modules are extinguished and the active status LEDs on the G700 Media Gateway are on, the reset is complete. 8 9 10 When the P330-1(super)# prompt appears, type session mgp. At the MGP-???-1(super)# prompt, type configure. Verify that the download was successful when the prompt returns. Type show mg list_config. The system displays the list of software. Example: Show mg list_config SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------230(A) 00 58 57 58 VOIP FW ------67 N/A N/A N/A N/A Install New Firmware on the Media Modules For upgrades of active media modules, you need to take the media modules out of service before initiating the upgrade process. To do this, go to a SAT session on the primary controller and issue a busyout command. NOTE: Skip this busyout procedure if the media modules are not in service; for example during an initial installation. Busyout board (for active media modules) 1 Go to a SAT session on the primary controller and enter the command, busyout board vx where x is the slot number of the media module to be upgraded. 2 3 Verify the response, Command Successfully Completed. Repeat for each media module to be upgraded. Install media module firmware 254 1 Be sure that you have checked for the current vintage of the VoIP Module for the v0 slot (on the G700 motherboard) (see Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700). This VoIP module does not occupy a physical position like other Media Modules. 2 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 3 4 At the MG-001-1(super)# prompt, type configure to change to the configuration mode. Type copy tftp mm-image v where is the slot of the specific media module as identified when you performed Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700, the full-path name of the media module firmware file in a format such mm712v58.fdl, and is the ip address of the S8300. Two or three minutes will be required for most upgrades. The VoIP Media Module upgrade takes approximately 5 minutes. Screen messages indicate when the transfer is complete. 5 After you have upgraded all the media modules, verify that the new versions are present. At the MG-???-1(configure)# prompt, type show mg list_config The list of software appears Show MG List_Config SLOT ---V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 TYPE -----G700 ICC DCP ANA DS1 CODE ----DAF1 S8300 MM712 MM711 MM710 SUFFIX -----A A A A A HW VINTAGE ---------00 72 2 2 1 FW VINTAGE ---------230(A) 00 58 57 58 VOIP FW ------67 N/A N/A N/A N/A 6 In the TYPE column, find the particular media module (v1 through v4), then check the matching field in the FW VINTAGE column to see if it matches the planning documentation. Note that slot V1 can contain either a media module or the S8300, which will show as Type "ICC". 7 Check the VOIP FW column and row for slot v0 to see if the number matches the VoIP firmware identified in the planning documentation. 8 9 Type reset where is the number of the G700 in the stack. When the reset is finished, type show mm to verify the upgrade. Release board (if media module was busied out) 1 When the upgrade procedure is complete, go to the SAT session and release the board: type release board vx where x is the slot number of the upgraded media module. 2 Verify the response, Command Successfully Completed. NOTE: If you see the response, Board Not Inserted, this means that the media module is still rebooting. Wait one minute and repeat the release board command. 3 Repeat the release board command for each media module that was busied out. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 255 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 Install New Firmware on Other G700 Media Gateways Stack Configuration If the customer has multiple G700 media gateways connected in an IP stack, you can stay connected to the master G700/P330 and "session" over from the master P330 stack processor to the next G700 in the stack. If you are dialed in remotely, you should have automatically dialed in to the stack master. For a local installation, you should have plugged your laptop into the stack master P330, which you can identify by the LED panel on the upper left of each G700 or P330 device in the stack. The LEDs signal as follows: • On the G700 Media Gateway: a lit MSTR LED indicates that this unit is the stack master. • On the P330 device: a lit SYS LED indicates that this unit is the stack master. The G700 and P330 at the bottom of the stack is module number 1, the next module up is number 2,. and so on. However, the stack master can be any module in the stack, depending on the actual model, the vintage firmware it runs, and whether the S8300 is inserted into it. NOTE: You do not need to configure the other P330 stack processors in the stack. These will use the IP address and IP route of the master stack processor. However, you will need to check firmware on all devices of the other G700s in the stack, including the media gateways themselves, and update the firmware as required. You may also use the "session stack" command to access other standalone P330 processors in the stack (those that are not part of a G700 unit). 1 At the MG-001-1(configure)# prompt, type session stack The P330-1(configure)# prompt appears. 2 At the P330-1(configure)# prompt, type session mgp is the next P330 processor in the stack. If you are currently logged in to the master stack processor, would be 2, for the second G700/P330 processor in the stack. 3 For other G700s in the stack, repeat the steps described previously to install firmware for the stack processor, MGP, and media modules. Remote, No Stack Configuration If additional G700 media gateways are supported in the configuration, but they are not attached as a stack, then you must configure each G700, with all of its devices, including the P330 processors. Additionally, you must check firmware and update the firmware as required. 256 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 If the S8300 is Using IA770 If the S8300 is Using IA770 Install and Restart IA770 1 2 3 4 Telnet to 192.11.13.6 Log in as craft or dadmin. Type cd /usr/CHIA Install IA770: a Type sudo ./autoinstall b When prompted to stop call processing, select y. The installation should take about 10 minutes from this point. NOTE: Communication Manager will shutdown. c Ensure that the autoinstall script completed successfully. You will see the message, "Successful Completion of IA770 Automatic Installation." 5 Enable messaging: a Go to the Web Interface and select Messaging Software under Miscellaneous. b If the Enable button shows at the bottom of the screen, click it to enable messaging. If the Disable button is showing, messaging is already enabled. 6 Restore AUDIX data: a Under Data Backup/Restore, click View/Restore Data. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 257 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 If the S8300 is Using IA770 b Select FTP and enter the information for the location of the backed up AUDIX Translations, Names, and Messages and click View. c Select the AUDIX Translations, Names, and Messages backup set, select both Force options, and click Restore. ! WARNING: AUDIX announcement sets from Communication Manager 1.x releases are not compatible with Release 2.0. Do not restore 1.x announcements onto a 2.0 system. d To monitor the restore progress: — select Restore History — select the backup set being restored and click Check Status 258 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 If the S8300 is Using IA770 — click Refresh periodically until "Completed Successfully" appears 7 Restart Communication Manager: a Open a Telnet session to the S8300 and type start -ac b Ensure that all Communication Manager processes come up. c After all Communication Manager processes are up, monitor the startup of IA770: Type watch /VM/bin/ss Press Ctrl+C to break out of the watch command. 8 Run an IA770 sanity test: a Type /vs/bin/display b All states should be "Inserv" with an associate phone number. c Retrieve the test message saved before the upgrade. Save Translations 1 2 3 In the telnet session, open a SAT session. Log in again as craft. Type save translation and press Enter. When the save is finished, the system displays the message, Command successfully completed. 4 If an IA770 post-upgrade update (patch) is required, see the IA770 documentation for procedures to install the update. Install IA770 update (patch) files, if any If IA770 is being used, a post-upgrade update (patch) for IA770 may be required. See the IA770 documentation for procedures to install an update. The documentation can be found on the Avaya Support Web Site at http://support.avaya.com. Then click on Product Documentation and then Messaging and scroll down to the INTUITY document links. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 259 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) Telnet to the S8300 (primary controller) and open a SAT session to complete the following procedures. Check Media Modules 1 2 Type list configuration all and press Enter. 3 Make test telephone calls to verify that Communication Manager is working. Verify that the software is communicating with all media modules and that all media modules are listed in the reports. Enable Scheduled Maintenance 1 2 Type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. Ensure that the Start Time and Stop Time fields’ administration is the same as before the upgrade. Busy Out Trunks 1 Busy out trunks that were busied out before the upgrade (see Pre-Upgrade Tasks — If the S8300 is the Primary Controller on page 221). Check for Translation Corruption 1 Type newterm and press Enter. If you do not get a login prompt and see the following message: Warning: Translation corruption detected follow the normal escalation procedure for translation corruption before continuing the upgrade. Resolve Alarms 260 1 On the Maintenance Web Interface, under Alarms click Current Alarms to examine the alarm log. 2 3 If any alarms are listed, click Clear All. Resolve new alarms since the upgrade through Communication Manager using the appropriate maintenance book. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) Re-enable Alarm Origination 1 2 Telnet to the S8300 and log on. At the command prompt, type almenable -d b -s y, where -d b sets the dialout option to both (numbers) -s y enables SNMP alarm origination 3 Type almenable (without any options) to verify that alarm origination status. Back up the System Using the Maintenance Web Interface, back up the system as you did before the upgrade selecting Save Translations and all backup sets. Restart LSPs (if any) To restart Communication Manager on the LSP after the upgrade: 1 2 3 Open a Telnet session on the S8300 (LSP). Telnet to the LSP. At the command line, type start -ac and press Enter. This completes the upgrade process for a G700 with an S8300. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 261 5 5 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0 Complete the Upgrade Process (S8300 is the Primary Controller) 262 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x This chapter covers the procedures to upgrade the software on an installed Avaya S8300 Media Server from release 2.0 to a later (2.x) release. It also covers the procedures to upgrade the firmware on an installed Avaya G700 Media Gateway. The S8300 can be configured as either the primary controller or as a local survivable processor (LSP). When the S8300 is an LSP, the primary controller, running Avaya Communication Manager, can be either another S8300 or an Avaya S8500 or S8700 Media Server. The steps to upgrade an S8300 configured as an LSP are the same as the steps to upgrade an S8300 configured as the primary controller, with the following additional considerations: • The version of Communication Manager running on the LSP must be the same as, or later than, the version running on the primary controller. • If upgrading both the primary controller and the LSP, the LSP must be upgraded first. Then, with Communication Manager turned off on the LSP, the primary controller is upgraded. CAUTION: This upgrade procedure requires a service interruption of approximately 2 hours, or up to 4 hours if IA770 is being used. Tip: The Upgrade Tool performs the following tasks automatically: Upgrade the S8300 on page 282 Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 on page 292 Upgrade the Firmware on the G700 on page 291. System Access To access the S8300 on-site, you will normally connect the technician’s laptop directly to the Services port on the S8300 using a crossover cable. See Connection and Login Methods on page 45 for instructions on accessing the S8300 and G700. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 263 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Task Summary Task Summary Before Going to the Site • • • • • • • Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager on page 266 Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary on page 266 Check Number of Allocated Ports on page 266 Check FTP Server for Backing up Data on page 267 Get Software/Firmware Files on page 267 Complete the RFA Process (Obtain license and password file) on page 267 Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary on page 269 On-Site Preparation Tasks If the S8300 is a Primary Controller • Pre-Upgrade Tasks — If the Target S8300 is the Primary Controller on page 271 • Get IA770 (AUDIX) Data and Stop IA770 (if IA770 is being used) on page 273 S8300 is Either a Primary Controller or LSP • • • • Back up recovery system files on page 274 Install New License and Authentication Files, If Necessary on page 276 Run Save Translations (Only If New License and/or Authentication Files Installed) on page 279 Transfer Files from a CD or Laptop on page 279 S8300 Upgrade Tasks • • • • Install New Software on page 282 Make the Upgrade Permanent on page 289 Install Post-Upgrade Communication Manager Update File from Your Laptop, if any on page 290 Install IA770 update (patch) files, if any on page 290 G700 Upgrade Using the Wizards • Using the Installation Wizard on page 291 • Using the Upgrade Tool on page 291 264 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Task Summary G700 Manual Upgrade Tasks G700 Pre-Upgrade Tasks • Verify the Contents of the tftpboot Directory on page 291 • Determine Which Firmware to Install on the G700 on page 292 G700 Upgrade Tasks • • • • Install New Firmware on the P330 Stack Processor on page 293 Install New Firmware on the G700 Media Gateway Processor on page 294 Install New Firmware on the Media Modules on page 295 Install New Firmware on Other G700 Media Gateways on page 297 Post-upgrade Tasks • • • • • • • • Check Media Modules on page 298 Enable Scheduled Maintenance on page 298 Busy Out Trunks on page 298 Check for Translation Corruption on page 298 Resolve Alarms on page 298 Re-enable Alarm Origination on page 298 Back up the System on page 299 Restart LSPs (if any) on page 299 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 265 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Before Going to the Customer Site Before Going to the Customer Site The procedures in this section should be completed before going to the customer site or before starting a remote installation. Collect Upgrade Information Get Planning Forms from the Project Manager The project manager should provide you with forms that contain all the information needed to prepare for this installation. The information primarily consists of IP addresses, subnet mask addresses, logins, passwords, people to contact, the type of system, and equipment you need to install. Verify that the information provided by the project manager includes all the information requested in your planning forms. Tip: Appendix B, “Information Checklists” provides several checklists to help you gather the installation and upgrade information. Get the Serial Number of the G700, if Necessary For an upgrade of an existing G700, the existing license file can usually be reused. However, if the customer is adding feature functionality (for example, adding BRI trunks), or if the upgrade is between major releases (for example, 1.3 to 2.0), you will need the serial number of the G700. To get this number, ask the customer’s administrator to log in to the S8300 web page and select View License Status from the main menu to display the serial number. For a new installation, you need the serial number of the G700 Media Gateway in order to complete the creation of the customer’s license file on the rfa.avaya.com web site. To get this number, look for the serial number sticker on the back of the G700 chassis. If the unit is delivered directly to the customer and you will not have phone or LAN line access from the customer site to access the rfa.avaya.com web site, this task will require a preliminary trip to the customer site. Check Number of Allocated Ports Release 2.0 of Communication Manager supports a maximum of 900 ports if the S8300 is a primary controller. If the existing system has more than 900 ports allocated, then there may be a problem with the upgrade and you need to escalate. Ask the customer to check the system for the maximum number of ports. Access the SAT command interface 266 1 Access the S8300 media server using a terminal emulation application or Avaya Site Administration. Use 192.11.13.6 as the address and 5023 as the port. 2 Log on as craft. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Before Going to the Customer Site 3 4 Type display system-parameters customer options and press Enter. Verify that the Maximum Ports: field is 900 or less. Check FTP Server for Backing up Data During the installation and upgrade procedures, you will need to back up the system data to an FTP server. Normally, you will use an FTP server on the customer’s LAN for backups. To do this, you will need information on how to get to the backup location — login ID and password, and the IP address and directory path on the FTP server. Check with your project manager or the customer for this information. CAUTION: Before going to the customer site, make sure that you can use a customer server for backups. Get Software/Firmware Files The file containing the S8300 software and G700 firmware has a *.tar extension. The *.tar file is on a CD-ROM that you take to the site. Additional files that may be needed are the most recent versions of the software update (patch) files and G700 firmware files. You may need to obtain these files from the Avaya Support web site. Complete the RFA Process (Obtain license and password file) Every S8300 media server and local survivable processor (LSP) requires a current and correct version of a license file in order to provide the expected call-processing service. The license file specifies the features and services that are available on the S8300 media server, such as the number of ports purchased. The license file contains a software version number, hardware serial number, expiration date, and feature mask. The license file is reinstalled to add or remove call-processing features. New license files may be required when upgrade software is installed. The Avaya authentication file contains the logins and passwords to access the S8300 media server. This file is updated regularly by Avaya services personnel, if the customer has a maintenance contract. All access to Communication Manager from any login is blocked unless a valid authentication file is present on the S8300 media server. A new license file and the Avaya authentication file may be installed independently of each other or any other server upgrades. NOTE: For an upgrade, you do not normally need to install a new authentication file (with a .pwd extension). However, if one is required, follow the same steps as with a license file. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 267 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Before Going to the Customer Site License File and Communication Manager Versions for a Local Survivable Processor The license file of the S8300 as an LSP must have a feature set that is equal to or greater than that of the media server that acts as primary controller (an S8300 or S8700). This is necessary so that if control passes to the LSP, it can allow the same level of call processing as that of the primary controller. Additionally, the LSP must have a version of Communication Manager that is identical to that of the primary controller. The license file requirements of the LSP should be identified in your planning documentation. Complete and Download the License File to Your Laptop 1 Use Windows File Explorer or another file management program to create a directory on your laptop for storing license and authentication files (for example, C:\licenses). 2 3 Access the Internet from your laptop and go to rfa.avaya.com. 4 Check that the license and authentication files are complete. You might need to add the serial number of the customer’s G700. 5 6 If the files are not complete, complete them. Use the System ID or the SAP ID of the customer to locate the license and authentication files for the customer. Use the download or E-mail capabilities of the RFA web site to download the license and authentication files to your laptop. Run the Automatic Registration Tool (ART) for the INADS IP Address, if Necessary This step is normally not necessary for an upgrade of an existing system. NOTE: ART is available only to Avaya associates. Business Partners call 800-295-0099. The ART tool is a software tool that generates an IP address for a customer’s INADS alarming modem. This IP address is required for configuring the S8300’s modem for alarming. NOTE: You must generate a license and authentication file before you use the ART tool. Also, the ART process is available only to Avaya personnel. You need an ART login ID and password, which you can set up at the ART web site. Non-Avaya personnel must contact their service support or customer care center for INADS addresses, if required. 1 2 Access the ART web site on your laptop at http://art.dr.avaya.com. Select Administer S8x00 Server products for installation script, log in, enter the customer information, select Installation Script, and click Start Installation script & IP Addr Admin. A script file is created and downloaded or emailed to you. 3 268 You can use the installation script to automatically set up an IP address and other alarming parameters. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Before Going to the Customer Site Obtain the Static Craft Password After installing new software and new Authentication file, you will need to use a static craft password to access the customer’s system. This static password will enable you to log in to the S8300 with a direct connection to the Services port without the ASG challenge/response. To obtain the static password, call the ASG Conversant number, 800-248-1234 or 720-444-5557 (or 877-295-0099 for Avaya Business Partners), and follow the prompts to get the password. In addition to your credentials, you will need to enter the customer’s Product ID or the FL or IL number. Download Software Update (patch) file to Your Laptop, if Necessary Skip to the next section if a software update is not required for this installation or upgrade, or if the software for the required updates are on your software CD. If one or more updates are required for this installation or upgrade procedure, and the update file is not on your software CD, download the update file from the Avaya Support web site to your laptop: 1 2 3 On your laptop, create a directory to store the file (for example, c:\S8300download). Connect to the LAN using a browser on your laptop or the customer’s PC and access http://www.avaya.com/support on the Internet to copy the required Communication Manager update file to the laptop. At the Avaya support site, select the following sequence of links: — Software & Firmware Downloads — G700 Media Gateway & S8300 Media Server — Software Downloads — Avaya Communication Manager Software Updates for MV x.x.x (where x.x.x is the release that is currently running on the S8300) 4 Locate the file name that matches the load listed in your planning documentation. The file name ends with .tar.gz (for example only, 03.0.526.5-5767.tar.gz). 5 6 Double-click the file name. The system displays a File Download window. Click on Save this file to disk. Save the file to an appropriate directory on your laptop. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 269 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Perform these tasks before starting the software upgrade on the S8300. Access to the S8300 To perform the installation and upgrade procedures you will need to connect your laptop to the S8300 Services port using a crossover cable. You will use both Telnet and the Maintenance Web Interface to perform the procedures. For a direct connection to the S8300 Services port, your laptop must be properly configured. See Laptop Configuration for a Direct Connection to the Services Port on page 47. Access the S8300 via Telnet To access the S8300 using Telnet, you 1 2 3 Click Start > Run to open the Run dialog box. Type telnet 192.11.13.6 and press Enter. Log in as craft or dadmin. Access the S8300 via the Maintenance Web interface 1 2 3 4 Launch the Web browser. Type 192.11.13.6 in the Address field to open the logon page. Log on as craft or dadmin when prompted. Click Launch Maintenance Web Interface to get to the Main Menu. Access SAT 1 From the bash CLI, type SAT and press Enter. Or, to open SAT directly from your laptop, click Start > Run and type telnet 192.11.13.6 5023 and press Enter. 2 3 4 270 Log in as craft or dadmin. Enter w2ktt for the Terminal Type (if you are running Windows 2000 on your laptop). Accept the default (y) for Suppress Alarm Origination. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Pre-Upgrade Tasks — If the Target S8300 is the Primary Controller If the S8300 is configured as an LSP, skip to Upgrade the S8300 on page 282. CAUTION: If you are upgrading an S8300 primary controller that has LSPs registered to it, the LSPs must be upgraded before the primary controller. (You can use the SAT command, list media-gateway, to see if there are LSPs registered to the S8300.) Perform the following procedures if you are upgrading an S8300 that is configured as a primary controller. NOTE: It is no longer necessary to disable Terminal Translation Initialization (TTI) before an upgrade or to enable it after an upgrade. Clear Alarms 1 On the Maintenance Web Interface under Alarms and Notification (Alarms for R2.0), click View Current Alarms (Current Alarms for R2.0). 2 3 4 If no alarms are listed, skip the next two steps. If alarms are listed, click Clear All. Resolve any remaining major alarms through the Communication Manager SAT. Check Link Status 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Open a SAT session. Enter display communication-interface links. Note all administered links. Enter status link number for each administered link. Enter list signaling group. Note the signaling groups listed by number. For each of the signaling groups listed, enter status signaling group number. Make a note of any links that are down. Record All Busyouts 1 2 At the SAT prompt, type display errors and press Enter. Look for type 18 errors and record any trunks that are busied out — you will return them to their busy-out state after the upgrade. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 271 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Disable Scheduled Maintenance To prevent scheduled daily maintenance from interfering with the upgrade: 1 2 At the SAT prompt, type change system-parameters maintenance and press Enter. If scheduled maintenance is in progress, set the Stop Time field to 1 minute after the current time. or If scheduled maintenance is not in progress, set the Start Time field to a time after the upgrade will be completed. For example, if you start the upgrade at 8:00 P.M. and the upgrade takes 90 minutes, set the Start Time field to 21:30. Check for Translation Corruption 1 2 At the SAT prompt, type newterm and press Enter. Enter your terminal type and press Enter. If you see the following message: Warning: Translation corruption found, then follow the normal escalation procedure for translation corruption before continuing the upgrade. Stop the LSPs (if applicable) Skip this procedure if no LSPs are registered to the S8300. For configurations with LSPs, the LSPs and the primary controller (S8300, S8500, or S8700) must run the same version Communication Manager. Therefore, an upgrade to an LSP is usually accompanied by an upgrade of the primary controller. You should upgrade the LSP before you upgrade the primary controller. Before you upgrade the primary controller, you need to shut down Communication Manager on the LSPs. This prevents the phones and other endpoints attached to the G700 from trying to register with the LSPs while you are upgrading the primary controller. To stop Communication Manager on an LSP: 1 2 3 Open a telnet session on the S8300 (LSP). Telnet to the LSP. At the command line, type stop -acfn and press Enter. The S8300 (LSP) shuts down Communication Manager. CAUTION: The LSP’s Communication Manager must remain shutdown while you upgrade the primary Controller. When you complete the primary controller upgrade, run save translation on the primary controller before restarting Communication Manager on the LSP. The save translations process will automatically cause the G700’s endpoints to reregister with the primary controller. After the primary controller has been upgraded, you need to restart the LSPs. 272 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Disable Alarm Origination If alarm origination is enabled during the upgrade, unnecessary alarms will be sent to the Operations Support System (OSS) destination number(s). Even if you selected "Suppress Alarm Origination" when you logged in, alarm origination will be automatically re-enabled when the system reboots after the software upgrade. Use this procedure to prevent alarm origination from being re-enabled after reboot. CAUTION: If you do not disable Alarm Origination, the system can generate alarms during the upgrade, resulting in unnecessary trouble tickets. To prevent alarm outcalling: 1 2 Logoff the SAT session At the command prompt, type almenable -d n -s n, where -d n sets the dialout option to neither (number) -s n disables SNMP alarm origination NOTE: Be sure to reset alarm origination after the upgrade. 3 Type almenable (without any options) to verify the alarm origination status. You should see: incoming: enable Dial Out Alarm Origination: neither SNMP Alarm Origination: N Get IA770 (AUDIX) Data and Stop IA770 (if IA770 is being used) If IA770 is being used, you need to collect some data, leave a test message, and shut down IA770 before backing up the files. 1 To test IA770 after the migration, write down the number of a test voice mailbox, or create one if none exists. Also write down the number of the IA770 hunt group. 2 3 4 Leave a message on the test mailbox that will be retrieved after the migration. Telnet to 192.11.13.6 and log in as craft or dadmin. Type stop -s Audix and press Enter to shut down AUDIX. The shutdown will take a few minutes. 5 Type watch /VM/bin/ss and press Enter to monitor the shutdown. When the shutdown is complete, you will see only the voicemail and audit processes. For example: voicemail:(10) audit http:(9) Press Ctrl+C to break out of the watch command. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 273 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade 6 Type /vs/bin/util/vs_status and press Enter to verify that AUDIX is shut down. When AUDIX is shut down, you will see "voice system is down." NOTE: After the S8300 upgrade, you must upgrade the G700 and media module firmware before restarting IA770. Back up recovery system files Before installing the S8300 software, you should back up the system data in case there’s a need to back out of the upgrade. You should back up to an FTP server on the customer’s network. To do this, you need an FTP address and directory path and a user ID and password to access the customer’s network. Check with your project manager or the customer for this information. You can also back up the system data to the S8300 hard drive. 274 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Back up data 1 Under Data Backup/Restore, click Backup Now. 2 Select all data sets: • • • • Avaya Call Processing (ACP) Translations Save ACP translations prior (do not save ACP translations if this is an LSP). Server and System Files Security Files 3 If the AUDIX options are available, select AUDIX and select AUDIX Translations, Names, and Messages 4 Select the FTP for the backup method and fill in the appropriate fields with information provided by the customer. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 275 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade 5 6 Click Start Backup to back up the files. If the AUDIX options are available, repeat Steps 3–5 for AUDIX Announcements. The announcements cannot be restored to the 2.0 system but they should be backed up in case it is necessary to revert to the 1.x system. Install New License and Authentication Files, If Necessary Skip to Transfer Files from a CD or Laptop on page 279 if you are not installing a new license or password file. For an upgrade, you need to load a new license file only when upgrading to a new major release of Communication Manager (for example, R2.x to R3.x) or when the feature set has changed. NOTE: If the S8300 is already set up for remote access, Avaya services personnel can copy new license and authentication files directly into the FTP directory on the server. Avaya personnel will notify you when the new files are in place as agreed (for example, by telephone or E-mail). After they are loaded into the FTP directory, install them using the License File and Authentication File screens from the S8300 main menu web-page. NOTE: Before an upload or download, be sure the S8300 FTP directory (/var/home/ftp/pub) contains no files with a .pwd or .lic extension. Only one of these files can exist in a directory. If one exists, move, rename, or delete it. If Necessary, Rename Old License and Authentication Files from S8300 FTP Directory Before an upload or download, be sure the S8300 FTP directory (/var/home/ftp/pub) contains no files with a .pwd or .lic extension. Only one of these files can exist in a directory. If one exists, move, rename, or delete it. 1 2 3 Log in to a telnet session on the S8300. At the command line, type cd /var/home/ftp/pub and press Enter. Type ls -l and press Enter. The system displays a list of files. 4 5 6 Check the list of files to see if any files with .lic or .pwd suffixes are in the directory. If any .lic or .pwd files exist, rename them. For example, type mv .lic .lic.old or mv .pwd .pwd.old and press Enter. Leave the telnet session open for a later task. Load License File (from Your Laptop) Use this procedure to transfer the license and password files from the CD or hard drive on your laptop to the S8300 hard drive. 276 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade 1 2 Log on to the S8300 Web Interface In the main menu under Miscellaneous, click Download Files. Download Files Screen 3 Select "Files to download from the machine I’m using to connect to the server" and click Browse for the first field. The S8300 displays the Choose File screen, which allows you to select files from your laptop. Choose File Screen 4 5 Locate the customer's license (.lic) file. When you have selected the .lic file, click Open in the dialog box. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 277 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade 6 7 8 9 Click Browse for the second field. Locate the customer’s .pwd file on your laptop. When you have selected the .pwd file, click Open in the dialog box. When you have finished entering the files to be uploaded, click Load File. When the files are successfully transferred, the system displays the status screen. If Necessary, Install License and Authentication Files 1 Under Security, select License File License File Screen 2 Select "Install the license file I previously downloaded" and click Submit. The system tells you the license is installed successfully. 3 278 Under Security, select Authentication File. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Install Authentication Screen 4 Select "Install the Authentication file I previously downloades" and click Install. The system tells you the authentication is installed successfully Run Save Translations (Only If New License and/or Authentication Files Installed) CAUTION: This procedure saves the official passwords for the customer’s system. If you fail to perform this step now, you may be irretrievably locked out of the system later in the installation when the system reboots. 1 2 In the telnet session, open a SAT session. and log in again as craft (or dadmin). At the SAT prompt, type save translation and press Enter. When the save is finished, the system displays the message, Command successfully completed. Transfer Files from a CD or Laptop Normally, during an upgrade, you will have the CD-ROM that contains the latest software to install. The latest software for the S8300 has a file name that has a .tar extension and reflects the most recent load of software (For example only: S8300-02.0-00.0.218.6.tar; for systems with IA770, the filename would be similar to S8300msg-02.0-00.0.218.6.tar). The latest update (patch) software for Communication Manager has a .tar.gz extension and a file name that reflects the most recent load of software (for example, 03.0.110.4-4925.tar.gz). This .tar file will also contain the most recent firmware for the G700 Media Gateway, the various media modules, and the P330 stack processor. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 279 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade Tip: The Avaya Installation Wizard performs tasks automatically starting with this section. 1 2 Log in to the S8300 Web interface. Choose Download Files under Miscellaneous on the left pane of the main menu. Download Files Screen 3 Select "Files to download from the machine I’m using to connect to the server," then click Browse for the first file. The S8300 displays the Choose File window, which allows you to select files from your laptop. 4 Browse to the tarfiles directory on the CD (or to where the .tar files are stored on your laptop). Double-click the filename of the .tar file for the upgrade software (for example, S8300-02.000.0.219.1.tar or S8300msg-02.0-00.0.219.1.tar if using IA770). You need only one .tar file for the upgrade software. 5 Repeat the previous two steps for each additional file that you want to upload. (For example, the lastest software update file, if any). 6 Click Download. When the files are successfully transferred, the system displays the Download Files Results screen with the following message: "The following files have been successfully uploaded to the server." 280 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x On-site Preparation for the Upgrade CAUTION: At this point you are finished with the software CD-ROM. Remove the CD from your laptop now to avoid possible problems the next time your laptop is rebooted. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 281 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 Upgrade the S8300 This section describes the procedures to upgrade the S8300 Media Server from Release 2.0 of Communication Manager to a later release. To upgrade from a pre-2.0 release to 2.0, use the procedures in Chapter 5, “Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R1.x to R2.0”. Install the Upgrade Software Using the Wizard You can complete the tasks in this section manually, as described. However, these tasks can be completed most efficiently by using the Avaya Installation Wizard or the Upgrade Tool. If the S8300 is a primary controller, use the Installation Wizard. If the S8300 is one of several LSPs controlled by the same primary controller, use the Upgrade Tool. To use the Installation Wizard, go to the Integrated Management main menu and click Launch Avaya Installation Wizard. To use the Upgrade Tool, go to the Integrated Management main menu and click Launch Avaya Upgrade Tool. Manual Installation If you are not using the Avaya Installation Wizard or Upgrade Tool, follow the steps in this section to upgrade the S8300 to the most recent load of software. CAUTION: For a new installation, be sure to set the time and time zone before installing the S8300 software. Failure to do so may cause network problems. Install New Software 1 2 Launch the Maintenance Web Interface. Choose Install New Software under Server Upgrades from the left pane of the main menu. The S8300 displays the Install New Software screen. 282 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 Choose Software Screen 3 On the Choose Software screen, select the software release number that you want to install (for example, the release listed in your planning documentation). Click Continue. The S8300 displays the Choose License Source screen. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 283 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 Choose License Source Screen 4 If you have installed the license and authentication files, select the following: — I want to reuse the license files from the currently active partition on this server. — Do not update authentication information. For a normal installation, the license and authentication files should have been installed at this point. If these files have not been installed, select the following: — I will supply the license/authentication files myself when prompted later in this process. — Update authentication information as well as license information. 5 284 Click Continue. The system displays the Review Notices screen. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 Review Notices Screen 6 For a new installation, or if you previously ran a backup, you do not need to run a backup at this time. If your planning documents instruct you to enable Tripwire, follow the instructions to reset the signature database. 7 Click Continue. The S8300 displays the Begin Installation screen, which summarizes the request you have made. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 285 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 Begin Installation Screen 8 At the Begin Installation screen, click Continue. The S8300 displays the Install in Progress screen. Install in Progress Screen 286 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 9 The installation will take approximately 10 to 20 minutes. The Install in Progress screen refreshes every 10 seconds or on demand by clicking the Refresh button. When complete, the S8300 displays the Reboot Server screen. Reboot Server Window 10 Click Reboot. If IA770 is being used, it may take approximately 5 minutes to shut down IA770 before the reboot begins. The S8300 displays the Reboot in Progress screen. Reboot in Progress Screen NOTE: The reboot can take 20 minutes or longer. The system does not automatically tell you when the reboot is complete. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 287 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 Wait 5 minutes (or about 20 minutes if running IA770) and then click Continue. If you click Continue before the reboot is finished, the screen will display "Expired Page." If you see the Expired Page message, refresh the browser. Or, if the Session Timeout screen appears, close the screen, logoff, and log on again. Click the Pickup button. You can also monitor the LEDs on the S8300 for progress on the installation. The Services port jack should have one yellow LED on the left that stays lit. The green LED on the right flashes until the reboot is complete. 11 When the reboot is complete, clicking Continue will display the Update Tripwire Database screen. 12 Unless instructed in your planning documents to update the tripwire database, select "Do not update the tripwire data base now" and click Continue. The system displays the Installation Complete screen. 288 Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 Installation Complete Screen 13 14 Click Close. You are returned to the main menu. Under Server, click Software Version to verify the new software version. Make the Upgrade Permanent CAUTION: You must make the upgrade of the software permanent so that the software is recognized and kept on the S8300. If you fail to make software permanent, then the next time you reboot, old software will become active. 1 From the S8300 main menu, under Server Upgrades click Make Upgrade Permanent . The S8300 displays the Make Server Upgrade Permanent window. 2 Click Submit. When the new S8300 upgrade software is permanent, the S8300 displays the message: The commit operation completed successfully. Installation and Upgrades for G700 and S8300 December 2003 289 6 6 Upgrading an Existing G700 with an S8300 — R2.0 to R2.x Upgrade the S8300 Install Post-Upgrade Communication Manager Update File from Your Laptop, if any NOTE: Skip this procedure if there is no Communication Manager update file to install. CAUTION: The software update may or may not be call-preserving. Use a telnet session to install the software update. 1 2 3 4 5 Click Start > Run to open the Run dialog box. Type telnet 192.11.13.6 and press Enter. Log in with the initial craft ID and password. (You cannot use dadmin at this point.) Type cd /var/home/ftp/pub and press Enter to access the pub directory. At the prompt, type ls -ltr and press Enter to list files in the pub directory. The media server displays a list of files in the FTP directory. Verify that the directory contains the Communication Manager .tar.gz file you have uploaded, if any. 6 Type sudo update_unpack .tar.gz, where is the release or issue number of the latest update file. (For example, 03.0.219.0-4925.tar.gz). Press Enter. 7 Type update_show and press Enter to list Communication Manager files to verify the new software file was installed. 8 Type sudo update_activate , where